1 #LyX 2.2 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
8 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
10 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
11 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
12 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
13 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
14 % the documentation team
15 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
17 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
18 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
20 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
21 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
23 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
25 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
26 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
28 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
29 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
30 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
31 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
33 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
37 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
38 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
40 % for customized page headers/footers
41 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
43 % change header rule width
44 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
46 % used to have extra space in table cells
47 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
48 {\usepackage{array}}{}
49 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
51 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
52 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
53 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
55 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
57 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
58 \use_default_options false
63 \maintain_unincluded_children false
65 \language_package default
70 \font_typewriter default
72 \font_default_family default
73 \use_non_tex_fonts false
79 \default_output_format default
81 \bibtex_command bibtex
82 \index_command default
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 0
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 0
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 0
110 \use_package stmaryrd 0
111 \use_package undertilde 0
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
121 \notefontcolor #0000ff
138 \paragraph_separation indent
139 \paragraph_indentation default
140 \quotes_language english
143 \paperpagestyle default
144 \tracking_changes false
145 \output_changes false
159 by the \SpecialChar LyX
164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
166 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
167 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
168 Documentation mailing list:
169 \begin_inset CommandInset href
171 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
182 \begin_inset Newline newline
186 \begin_inset Newline newline
190 \begin_inset Note Note
193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
194 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
195 \begin_inset Newline newline
200 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
201 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
209 \begin_layout Standard
210 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
211 LatexCommand tableofcontents
218 \begin_layout Chapter
222 \begin_layout Section
223 What is \SpecialChar LyX
227 \begin_layout Standard
229 is a document preparation system.
230 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
231 scripts, publishable books, business
232 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
233 It is unlike most other
234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
241 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
243 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
259 pt type, left justified, 5
260 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
269 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
273 \begin_layout Standard
274 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
279 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
283 \begin_layout Standard
288 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
289 's philosophy: most importantly,
290 the format of all of the manuals.
291 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
292 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
298 manual describes that, too.
301 \begin_layout Section
306 \begin_layout Standard
307 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
308 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
310 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
311 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
315 \begin_layout Standard
316 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
317 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
318 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
320 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
321 only a vertical scrollbar.
322 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
323 The first case is large images.
324 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
325 image and use the option
336 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
339 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
340 this doesn't work for equations yet.
343 \begin_layout Standard
344 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
345 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
353 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
360 \begin_layout Section
364 \begin_layout Standard
365 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
367 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
369 Just select the manual you want to read from the
376 \begin_layout Section
377 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
379 \begin_inset CommandInset label
381 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
388 \begin_layout Standard
389 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
390 can be configured via the menu
392 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
396 \begin_inset Index idx
399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
406 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
408 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
409 packages are available.
410 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
412 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
414 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
419 \begin_inset space \space{}
422 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
423 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
425 To force \SpecialChar LyX
426 to re-inspect your system, you should use
428 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
432 \begin_inset Index idx
435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
436 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
442 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
443 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
446 \begin_layout Section
449 \begin_inset CommandInset label
451 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
458 \begin_layout Standard
459 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
460 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
461 installed, but you will not be
462 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
463 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
464 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
465 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
466 document can always be output as plain text
470 \begin_layout Standard
471 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
472 or DocBook classes or packages.
473 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
474 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
477 \begin_layout Standard
478 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
479 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
480 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
483 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
502 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
503 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
506 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
510 \begin_inset Note Note
513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
514 The two braces in the \SpecialChar TeX
515 Code box prevent that the term
516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
524 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
525 More about \SpecialChar TeX
526 Code is described in section
531 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
533 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
537 , the printout of proper names like \SpecialChar LaTeX
538 is explained in section
543 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
545 reference "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
555 \begin_inset Index idx
558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
559 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
565 See section 5.1 of the
569 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
573 \begin_layout Chapter
574 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
578 \begin_layout Section
579 Basic File Operations
580 \begin_inset Index idx
583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
592 \begin_layout Standard
597 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
598 in addition to some more advanced operations:
601 \begin_layout Itemize
623 \begin_layout Itemize
639 arg "buffer-new-template"
645 \begin_layout Itemize
667 \begin_layout Itemize
677 \begin_layout Itemize
691 \begin_layout Itemize
713 \begin_layout Itemize
725 arg "buffer-write-as"
731 \begin_layout Itemize
745 \begin_layout Itemize
759 \begin_layout Standard
760 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
761 a few minor differences.
764 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
775 command lists the available templates.
776 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
777 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
778 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
780 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
786 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
793 \begin_layout Standard
794 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
826 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
827 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
828 is just that — a big, blank space.
836 \begin_layout Standard
857 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
862 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
865 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
883 will reload the document from disk.
884 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
885 and want to restore it to the last save.
894 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
895 them as your changes.
898 \begin_layout Section
899 Basic Editing Features
900 \begin_inset Index idx
903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
910 \begin_inset CommandInset label
912 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
919 \begin_layout Standard
920 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
921 can perform cut and paste operations
922 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
923 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
924 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
925 editing features and how to access
927 We will start with cut and paste.
930 \begin_layout Standard
931 As you might expect, the
935 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
936 various other editing features.
937 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
941 \begin_layout Itemize
947 \begin_inset Index idx
950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
979 \begin_layout Itemize
985 \begin_inset Index idx
988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1017 \begin_layout Itemize
1023 \begin_inset Index idx
1026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1051 \begin_layout Itemize
1055 \begin_inset space ~
1061 \begin_layout Itemize
1065 \begin_inset space ~
1071 \begin_layout Itemize
1075 \begin_inset space ~
1079 \begin_inset space ~
1085 \begin_inset Index idx
1088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1097 \begin_inset Index idx
1100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1115 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1125 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1131 \begin_layout Standard
1132 The first three are self-explanatory.
1133 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1134 and other programs by
1155 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1156 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1161 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1162 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1163 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1164 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1165 into individual cells.
1169 \begin_inset space ~
1174 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1175 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1179 \begin_layout Standard
1183 \begin_inset space ~
1188 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1190 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1192 \begin_inset space ~
1199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1205 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1206 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1207 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1209 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1213 \begin_inset space \space{}
1216 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1217 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1220 \begin_inset space ~
1223 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1225 \begin_inset space ~
1229 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1233 \begin_inset space ~
1242 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1243 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1245 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1249 \begin_inset space ~
1254 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1255 start a new paragraph.
1256 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1257 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1262 \begin_inset space ~
1265 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1267 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1271 \begin_inset space ~
1279 \begin_inset space ~
1282 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1285 paste from the primary selection.
1286 This is normally the currently selected text.
1289 \begin_layout Standard
1292 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1294 \begin_inset space ~
1298 \begin_inset space ~
1306 \begin_inset space ~
1310 \begin_inset space ~
1316 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1322 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1325 \begin_inset space ~
1334 \begin_inset space ~
1339 button to skip the current word.
1343 \begin_inset space ~
1348 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1352 \begin_inset space ~
1357 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1359 If the toggle is set, searching for
1360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1371 will not match the word
1372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1386 Match whole words only
1388 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1389 to only find complete words, e.
1390 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1419 offers also an advanced
1422 \begin_inset space ~
1426 \begin_inset space ~
1431 feature that is described in sec.
1432 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1438 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1445 \begin_layout Standard
1446 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1447 \begin_inset space \space{}
1451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1459 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1461 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1466 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1473 \begin_layout Standard
1477 arg "inset-select-all"
1480 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1481 When the cursor is inside an inset
1484 arg "inset-select-all"
1487 selects the content of the inset.
1491 arg "inset-select-all"
1494 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1499 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1502 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1506 \begin_layout Section
1508 \begin_inset Index idx
1511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1518 \begin_inset Index idx
1521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1528 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1530 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1537 \begin_layout Standard
1538 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1540 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1543 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1546 or the toolbar button
1552 to undo some mistake.
1553 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1555 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1558 or the toolbar button
1565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1572 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1573 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1576 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1579 \begin_layout Standard
1580 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1589 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1590 This is a consequence of the 100
1591 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1594 step undo limit mentioned above.
1597 \begin_layout Standard
1606 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1608 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1612 \begin_layout Section
1614 \begin_inset Index idx
1617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1626 \begin_layout Standard
1627 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1630 \begin_layout Enumerate
1635 \begin_layout Itemize
1640 once anywhere in the edit window.
1641 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1645 \begin_layout Enumerate
1650 \begin_layout Itemize
1657 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1660 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1663 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1664 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1667 \begin_layout Itemize
1668 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1671 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1678 \begin_layout Enumerate
1679 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1683 \begin_layout Standard
1684 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1685 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1689 \begin_layout Section
1691 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1693 name "sec:Navigating"
1698 \begin_inset Index idx
1701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1710 \begin_layout Standard
1712 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1715 \begin_layout Itemize
1720 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1721 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1724 \begin_layout Itemize
1725 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1727 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1729 \begin_inset space ~
1734 or by the toolbar button
1737 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1743 \begin_layout Itemize
1744 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1746 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1749 and use the same menu to return to them.
1750 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1753 \begin_layout Standard
1757 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1762 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1763 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1765 \begin_inset space ~
1770 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1771 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1772 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1773 your last editing position.
1776 \begin_layout Standard
1781 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1785 \begin_layout Subsection
1787 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1789 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1796 \begin_layout Standard
1797 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1798 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1799 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1801 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1807 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1811 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1812 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1818 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1823 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1827 \begin_layout Standard
1828 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1829 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1830 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1831 dialog and to modify the citation.
1834 \begin_layout Standard
1835 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1837 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1838 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1846 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1849 \begin_layout Standard
1850 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1851 you further to control the display.
1856 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1857 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1863 option keeps it in the current view state.
1864 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1865 \begin_inset space ~
1868 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1869 \begin_inset space ~
1872 3, the subsections of sections
1873 \begin_inset space ~
1876 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1881 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1882 \begin_inset space ~
1886 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1896 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1899 \begin_layout Standard
1906 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1907 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1921 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1922 So, for example, you can move section
1923 \begin_inset space ~
1927 \begin_inset space ~
1930 2.4 or after section
1931 \begin_inset space ~
1936 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1949 (or the corresponding key bindings
1957 ) you can change the level of sections.
1958 So you can for example make section
1959 \begin_inset space ~
1963 \begin_inset space ~
1967 \begin_inset space ~
1973 \begin_layout Section
1974 Input/Word Completion
1975 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1977 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1982 \begin_inset Index idx
1985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1992 \begin_inset Index idx
1995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2026 \begin_layout Standard
2028 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2030 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2031 is used to propose completions.
2034 \begin_layout Standard
2035 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2038 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2043 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2050 \begin_inset space ~
2054 \begin_inset space ~
2059 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2063 \begin_inset space ~
2068 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2069 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2073 \begin_inset space ~
2079 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2080 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2081 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2082 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2085 \begin_layout Standard
2087 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2088 completions available.
2093 key to accept a proposed completion.
2094 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2095 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2096 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2103 \begin_layout Standard
2104 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2105 ing options for text.
2106 The special math option
2110 enables characters to be composed.
2111 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2112 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2115 , you can then input the characters
2116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2124 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2127 to a formula to get it.
2128 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2129 of the math toolbar.
2130 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2134 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2135 's installation folder.
2136 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2145 \begin_layout Section
2147 \begin_inset Index idx
2150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2157 \begin_inset Index idx
2160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2189 \begin_inset Index idx
2192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2223 \begin_layout Standard
2224 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2238 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2241 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2245 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2246 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2250 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2252 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2259 \begin_layout Standard
2263 \begin_inset space ~
2271 \begin_inset space ~
2292 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2296 \begin_layout Labeling
2297 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2301 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2302 LatexCommand nomenclature
2304 description "Tabulator key"
2310 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2312 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2313 \begin_inset space ~
2317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2319 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2326 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2330 , especially section
2331 \begin_inset space ~
2335 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2337 reference "subsec:Lists"
2343 If you are still confused, look in the
2348 \begin_inset Newline newline
2356 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2357 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2361 \begin_layout Labeling
2362 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2366 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2367 LatexCommand nomenclature
2369 description "Escape key"
2376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2383 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2384 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2387 \begin_layout Labeling
2388 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2394 \begin_inset space ~
2398 \begin_inset space ~
2405 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2406 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2410 \begin_layout Standard
2411 There are three modifier keys:
2414 \begin_layout Labeling
2415 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2433 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2434 LatexCommand nomenclature
2436 description "Control key"
2440 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2441 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2445 \begin_layout Itemize
2454 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2457 \begin_layout Itemize
2466 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2469 \begin_layout Itemize
2478 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2482 \begin_layout Labeling
2483 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2501 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2502 LatexCommand nomenclature
2504 description "Shift key"
2508 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2509 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2512 \begin_layout Labeling
2513 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2531 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2532 LatexCommand nomenclature
2534 description "Alt or Meta key"
2538 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2539 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2540 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2546 \begin_inset Newline newline
2549 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2551 menu accelerator keys
2554 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2555 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2559 \begin_layout Standard
2560 For example, the sequence
2561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2567 \begin_inset space ~
2571 \begin_inset space ~
2577 \begin_inset space ~
2585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2604 \begin_inset space ~
2610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2620 \begin_layout Standard
2625 manual lists all other things bound to the
2633 \begin_layout Standard
2634 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2636 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2637 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2638 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2639 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2640 The \SpecialChar LyX
2641 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2642 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2643 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2645 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2661 followed by a capital
2668 \begin_layout Chapter
2671 \begin_inset Index idx
2674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2684 \begin_layout Section
2686 \begin_inset Index idx
2689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2698 \begin_layout Subsection
2702 \begin_layout Standard
2703 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2704 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2705 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2706 numbering schemes, and so on.
2707 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2708 and format the title of your document differently.
2711 \begin_layout Standard
2716 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2717 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2718 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2719 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2720 picks one for you by default.
2721 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2724 \begin_layout Subsection
2726 \begin_inset Index idx
2729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2736 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2738 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2745 \begin_layout Standard
2746 You can select a class using the
2748 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2749 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2753 \begin_inset Index idx
2756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2763 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2767 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2771 \begin_layout Standard
2772 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2777 \begin_layout Description
2778 Article for basic articles
2781 \begin_layout Description
2782 Report for basic reports
2785 \begin_layout Description
2786 Book for writing a book
2789 \begin_layout Description
2790 Letter for US-style letters
2793 \begin_layout Standard
2794 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2795 only uses if you have installed
2796 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2797 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2798 distributions will include
2800 Here are some of the classes.
2801 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2803 Special Document Classes
2812 \begin_layout Description
2813 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2816 \begin_layout Description
2817 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2821 \begin_layout Description
2822 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2826 \begin_layout Description
2827 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2828 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2829 There are three article layouts available.
2830 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2831 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2832 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2833 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2838 sequential numbering
2839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2842 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2843 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2844 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2845 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2848 \begin_layout Description
2849 Beamer Layout for presentations
2852 \begin_layout Description
2853 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2854 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2855 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2856 with \SpecialChar LyX
2860 \begin_layout Description
2861 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2864 \begin_layout Description
2866 \begin_inset space ~
2869 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2872 \begin_layout Description
2873 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2876 \begin_layout Description
2877 Foils Used to make transparencies
2880 \begin_layout Description
2881 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2882 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2883 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2884 with \SpecialChar LyX
2888 \begin_layout Description
2889 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2890 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2893 \begin_layout Description
2894 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2897 \begin_layout Description
2898 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2901 \begin_layout Description
2902 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2903 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2904 (Is used by this document.)
2907 \begin_layout Description
2908 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2911 \begin_layout Description
2912 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2915 \begin_layout Description
2920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2927 X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2928 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2930 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
2934 \begin_layout Description
2935 Slides Used to make transparencies
2938 \begin_layout Description
2940 \begin_inset space ~
2943 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2944 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2947 \begin_layout Description
2948 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2951 \begin_layout Standard
2952 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2954 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2960 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2961 of the document classes.
2964 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2968 \begin_layout Standard
2969 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2971 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2972 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2974 \begin_inset Index idx
2977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2994 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2995 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2997 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3000 \begin_layout Standard
3003 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3008 , are highly specialized.
3010 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3011 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3012 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3013 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3014 by some document class.
3015 There are just too many of them.
3016 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3019 \begin_layout Standard
3020 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3028 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3029 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3030 document class for a new file.
3032 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3037 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3039 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3046 manual for information on how to install them.
3047 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3053 \begin_layout Standard
3054 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3055 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3056 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3057 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3058 class files to be used for dissertation
3059 s submitted to those universities.
3060 The \SpecialChar LyX
3061 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3063 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3067 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3073 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3076 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3078 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3080 name "subsec:Modules"
3085 \begin_inset Index idx
3088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3097 \begin_layout Standard
3098 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3099 chosen document class.
3100 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3101 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3108 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3112 \begin_inset Index idx
3115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3122 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3126 \begin_layout Standard
3127 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3128 packages or file format converters that are not always
3129 installed by default.
3131 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3132 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3133 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3134 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3136 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3137 file without the missing prerequisites.
3138 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3139 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3142 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3146 \begin_inset Index idx
3149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3150 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3160 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3169 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3172 \begin_layout Standard
3173 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3181 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3183 will advise you about these things.
3191 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3193 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3195 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3200 \begin_inset Index idx
3203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3204 Document ! Local Layout
3212 \begin_layout Standard
3213 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3214 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3215 : They are intended to be used in
3216 a variety of different documents.
3217 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3218 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3219 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3220 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3221 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3223 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3241 manual for information on how to use it.
3244 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3248 \begin_layout Standard
3249 Each class has a default set of options.
3250 Here's a quick table describing them:
3253 \begin_layout Standard
3254 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3260 \begin_layout Standard
3262 \begin_inset Tabular
3263 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3264 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3265 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3266 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3267 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3268 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3269 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3723 \begin_layout Standard
3724 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3730 \begin_layout Standard
3731 You're probably also wondering what
3732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3736 \begin_inset space ~
3740 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3744 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3745 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3750 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3755 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3765 headings, there are also
3773 headings, and so on.
3774 We will describe these headings fully in section
3775 \begin_inset space ~
3779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3781 reference "subsec:Headings"
3788 \begin_layout Subsection
3790 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3792 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3797 \begin_inset Index idx
3800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3807 \begin_inset Index idx
3810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3819 \begin_layout Standard
3820 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3822 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3829 \begin_inset space ~
3837 \begin_inset space ~
3842 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3844 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3845 doesn't support special options you want to
3846 use for your document.
3847 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3848 -class and its options, you have to read
3852 \begin_layout Standard
3856 \begin_inset space ~
3863 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3869 \begin_inset space ~
3874 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3875 You can choose between the following five options:
3878 \begin_layout Labeling
3879 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3884 Use default page style of current class.
3887 \begin_layout Labeling
3888 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3893 No page numbers or headings.
3896 \begin_layout Labeling
3897 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3905 \begin_layout Labeling
3906 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3911 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3912 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
3913 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
3914 maximum sectioning level of the class.
3917 \begin_layout Labeling
3918 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3923 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3924 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3930 \begin_inset Index idx
3933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3935 -packages ! fancyhdr
3941 How they are defined is explained in section
3942 \begin_inset space ~
3946 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3948 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3955 \begin_layout Standard
3956 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3957 \begin_inset space ~
3961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3963 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
3970 \begin_layout Subsection
3971 Paper Size and Orientation
3972 \begin_inset Index idx
3975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3976 Document ! Paper size
3982 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3984 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3991 \begin_layout Standard
3992 You can find the following options in the menu
3995 \begin_inset space ~
4002 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4006 \begin_inset Index idx
4009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4018 \begin_layout Labeling
4019 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4023 \begin_inset space ~
4028 What size paper to print on.
4033 \begin_layout Itemize
4039 \begin_layout Itemize
4045 \begin_layout Itemize
4051 \begin_layout Itemize
4057 \begin_layout Itemize
4060 US letter, US legal, US executive
4063 \begin_layout Itemize
4069 \begin_layout Itemize
4076 \begin_layout Labeling
4077 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4082 To choose whether to output as
4093 \begin_layout Labeling
4094 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4098 \begin_inset space ~
4103 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4104 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4107 \begin_layout Subsection
4109 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4111 name "subsec:Margins"
4116 \begin_inset Index idx
4119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4126 \begin_inset Index idx
4129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4138 \begin_layout Standard
4139 Paper margins are set in the menu
4141 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4145 \begin_inset Index idx
4148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4157 \begin_layout Standard
4158 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4159 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4160 the paper format and the font size into account.
4163 \begin_layout Subsection
4167 \begin_layout Standard
4168 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4174 That includes the paragraph environments.
4175 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4176 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4177 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4179 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4188 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4190 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4191 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4192 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4195 \begin_layout Section
4196 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4197 \begin_inset Index idx
4200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4201 Paragraph ! Indentation
4209 \begin_layout Subsection
4211 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4213 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4220 \begin_layout Standard
4221 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4222 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4225 \begin_layout Standard
4226 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4227 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4228 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4229 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4233 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4239 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4240 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4241 language than English.
4243 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4246 \begin_layout Standard
4247 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4248 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4249 into \SpecialChar LyX
4251 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4254 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4256 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4257 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4258 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4265 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4266 goes to produce a printable file.
4271 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4273 gives you the ability globally to change
4277 these pre-coded spacings.
4278 We will explain more later.
4281 \begin_layout Subsection
4282 Paragraph Separation
4283 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4285 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4290 \begin_inset Index idx
4293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4294 Paragraph ! Separation
4302 \begin_layout Standard
4310 \begin_inset space ~
4318 \begin_inset space ~
4325 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4329 \begin_inset Index idx
4332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4338 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4341 \begin_layout Subsection
4345 \begin_layout Standard
4346 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4349 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4351 \begin_inset space ~
4356 dialog and toggle the
4359 \begin_inset space ~
4364 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4367 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4371 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4372 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4376 \begin_layout Standard
4377 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4378 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4381 \begin_layout Subsection
4383 \begin_inset Index idx
4386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4387 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4395 \begin_layout Standard
4398 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4402 \begin_inset Index idx
4405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4414 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4418 \begin_inset space ~
4427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4428 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4434 \begin_inset Index idx
4437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4439 -packages ! setspace
4444 installed to use this feature.
4449 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4451 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4453 \begin_inset space ~
4458 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4459 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4462 \begin_layout Section
4463 Paragraph Environments
4464 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4466 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4471 \begin_inset Index idx
4474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4475 Paragraph ! Environments
4481 \begin_inset Index idx
4484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4485 Paragraph environments|(
4493 \begin_layout Subsection
4497 \begin_layout Standard
4498 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4501 \begin_layout Standard
4520 \begin_inset Newline newline
4523 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4525 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4526 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4527 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4536 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4539 \begin_layout Standard
4540 A paragraph environment is simply a
4541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4548 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4549 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4550 scheme, labels, and so on.
4551 Additionally, you can
4552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4559 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4560 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4561 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4562 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4564 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4566 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4569 \begin_layout Standard
4570 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4571 \begin_inset Graphics
4572 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4578 at the left end of the toolbar.
4580 will change the environment of the
4584 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4585 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4586 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4590 \begin_layout Standard
4599 create a new paragraph using the
4603 paragraph environment.
4605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4612 because if you are in one of these environments:
4615 \begin_layout Itemize
4621 \begin_layout Itemize
4627 \begin_layout Itemize
4633 \begin_layout Itemize
4639 \begin_layout Itemize
4645 \begin_layout Itemize
4651 \begin_layout Itemize
4657 \begin_layout Standard
4659 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4663 , rather than resetting it to
4668 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4669 \begin_inset space ~
4673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4675 reference "sec:Nesting"
4682 \begin_layout Subsection
4686 \begin_layout Standard
4687 The default paragraph environment is
4692 It creates a plain paragraph.
4694 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4695 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4696 this manual) are in the
4703 \begin_layout Standard
4704 You can nest a paragraph using the
4708 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4716 \begin_layout Subsection
4718 \begin_inset Index idx
4721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4730 \begin_layout Standard
4731 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4732 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4741 for thanks or contact information.
4742 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4743 places all of this on a separate page
4744 along with today's date.
4745 For other types of documents, the title
4746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4753 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4757 \begin_layout Standard
4759 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4773 Here's how you use them:
4776 \begin_layout Itemize
4777 Put the title of your document in the
4784 \begin_layout Itemize
4785 Put the author name in the
4792 \begin_layout Itemize
4793 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4794 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4800 Note that using this environment is optional.
4801 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4802 will automatically insert today's date.
4803 If you don't want a date, use the option
4805 Suppress default date on front page
4809 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4810 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4812 \begin_inset space ~
4820 \begin_layout Standard
4821 You can use footnotes to insert
4822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4829 or contact information.
4832 \begin_layout Subsection
4834 \begin_inset Index idx
4837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4844 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4846 name "subsec:Headings"
4853 \begin_layout Standard
4854 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4856 takes care of the numbering for you.
4859 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4861 \begin_inset Index idx
4864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4865 Section headings ! Numbered
4873 \begin_layout Standard
4874 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4878 \begin_layout Enumerate
4884 \begin_layout Enumerate
4890 \begin_layout Enumerate
4896 \begin_layout Enumerate
4902 \begin_layout Enumerate
4908 \begin_layout Enumerate
4914 \begin_layout Enumerate
4920 \begin_layout Standard
4922 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4923 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4924 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4927 \begin_layout Standard
4928 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4929 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4930 You group the book into chapters.
4932 does a similar grouping:
4935 \begin_layout Itemize
4940 is divided into either
4951 \begin_layout Itemize
4963 \begin_layout Itemize
4975 \begin_layout Itemize
4987 \begin_layout Itemize
4999 \begin_layout Itemize
5011 \begin_layout Standard
5012 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5020 Not all document types use the
5024 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5029 is the top-level heading.
5037 \begin_layout Standard
5042 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5043 labels it with its number,
5044 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5046 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5058 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5060 \begin_inset Index idx
5063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5064 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5072 \begin_layout Standard
5073 The unnumbered section headings have a
5074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5081 at the end of their name.
5082 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5083 the table of contents, see section
5084 \begin_inset space ~
5088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5097 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5098 Changing the Numbering
5099 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5101 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5108 \begin_layout Standard
5109 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5110 in the Table of Contents.
5111 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5113 Just as certain classes start with
5127 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5137 This is something you can change.
5140 \begin_layout Standard
5143 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5147 \begin_inset Index idx
5150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5159 \begin_inset space ~
5163 \begin_inset space ~
5168 you will see two counters.
5173 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5174 numbers a section heading.
5175 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5179 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5180 Short Titles of Headings
5181 \begin_inset Index idx
5184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5185 Section headings ! Short titles
5191 \begin_inset Argument 1
5194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5201 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5203 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5210 \begin_layout Standard
5211 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5212 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5213 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5214 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5217 \begin_layout Standard
5219 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5220 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5221 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5222 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5225 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5227 \begin_inset space ~
5233 This will insert a box labeled
5234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5238 \begin_inset space ~
5242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5245 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5246 This also works for captions inside floats.
5247 There can only be one short title per title.
5250 \begin_layout Standard
5251 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5254 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5258 \begin_layout Standard
5259 The following information applies to all section headings:
5262 \begin_layout Itemize
5263 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5266 \begin_layout Itemize
5267 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5270 \begin_layout Itemize
5271 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5274 \begin_layout Itemize
5275 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5278 \begin_layout Subsection
5282 \begin_layout Standard
5284 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5298 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5299 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5300 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5301 the text they contain.
5302 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5310 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5313 \begin_layout Standard
5314 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5323 when you start a new paragraph.
5324 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5328 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5329 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5330 have to change back to the
5334 environment yourself.
5337 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5339 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5346 \begin_inset Index idx
5349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5358 \begin_layout Standard
5359 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5360 time for the differences.
5369 are identical except for one difference:
5373 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5382 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5385 \begin_layout Standard
5386 Here's an example of the
5399 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5401 See – no indentation!
5405 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5406 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5407 the other paragraph.
5410 \begin_layout Standard
5411 Here's another example, this time in the
5418 \begin_layout Quotation
5424 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5425 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5426 the first line, then
5430 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5434 you were quoting other text.
5437 \begin_layout Quotation
5438 Here's a new paragraph.
5439 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5440 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5443 \begin_layout Standard
5444 As the examples show,
5448 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5449 They should put quotes in the
5454 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5458 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5461 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5463 \begin_inset Index idx
5466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5473 \begin_inset Index idx
5476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5483 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5492 \begin_layout Standard
5497 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5503 \begin_inset Newline newline
5506 Which I did not rehearse!
5510 It could be much worse.
5511 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5513 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5514 indented a bit more than the first.
5515 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5521 \begin_inset Newline newline
5524 And make things look fine
5525 \begin_inset Newline newline
5531 arg "newline-insert newline"
5537 \begin_layout Standard
5542 does not indent both margins.
5543 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5544 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5547 arg "newline-insert newline"
5553 \begin_layout Subsection
5555 \begin_inset Index idx
5558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5565 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5574 \begin_layout Standard
5576 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5586 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5587 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5596 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5597 lets you provide your own label.
5598 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5599 describing some general features of all four of them.
5602 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5606 \begin_layout Standard
5607 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5609 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5610 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5619 reset the environment to
5623 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5624 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5625 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5629 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5633 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5640 \begin_layout Standard
5641 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5642 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5643 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5645 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5646 you read all of section
5647 \begin_inset space ~
5651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5653 reference "sec:Nesting"
5660 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5662 \begin_inset Index idx
5665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5672 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5681 \begin_layout Standard
5682 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5686 paragraph environment.
5687 It has the following properties:
5690 \begin_layout Itemize
5691 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5695 \begin_layout Itemize
5697 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5700 \begin_layout Itemize
5701 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5705 \begin_layout Itemize
5706 The items can have any length.
5708 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5709 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5716 \begin_layout Itemize
5721 environment inside another
5725 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5729 \begin_layout Itemize
5730 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5733 \begin_layout Itemize
5735 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5738 \begin_layout Itemize
5740 \begin_inset space ~
5744 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5746 reference "sec:Nesting"
5750 for a full explanation of nesting.
5754 \begin_layout Standard
5755 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5764 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5767 \begin_layout Standard
5768 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5769 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5772 \begin_layout Itemize
5773 The label for the first level
5777 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5781 \begin_layout Itemize
5782 The label for the second level is a dash.
5786 \begin_layout Itemize
5787 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5791 \begin_layout Itemize
5792 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5796 \begin_layout Itemize
5797 Back out to the third level.
5801 \begin_layout Itemize
5802 Back to the second level.
5806 \begin_layout Itemize
5807 Back to the outermost level.
5810 \begin_layout Standard
5811 These are the default labels for an
5816 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5818 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5821 dialog in the submenu
5826 \begin_inset Index idx
5829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5835 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5839 \begin_layout Standard
5840 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5841 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5843 \begin_inset space ~
5847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5849 reference "sec:Nesting"
5856 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5858 \begin_inset Index idx
5861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5868 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5870 name "sec:Enumerate"
5877 \begin_layout Standard
5882 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5883 It has these properties:
5886 \begin_layout Enumerate
5887 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5891 \begin_layout Enumerate
5892 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5896 \begin_layout Enumerate
5898 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5901 \begin_layout Enumerate
5906 environment resets the counter to one.
5909 \begin_layout Enumerate
5922 \begin_layout Enumerate
5923 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5924 Items can have any length.
5927 \begin_layout Enumerate
5928 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5931 \begin_layout Enumerate
5932 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5935 \begin_layout Enumerate
5936 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5940 \begin_layout Standard
5949 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
5951 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
5952 labels the four different levels in an
5959 \begin_layout Enumerate
5960 The first level of an
5964 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5968 \begin_layout Enumerate
5969 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5973 \begin_layout Enumerate
5974 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5978 \begin_layout Enumerate
5979 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5982 \begin_layout Enumerate
5983 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5988 \begin_layout Enumerate
5989 Back to the third level
5993 \begin_layout Enumerate
5994 Back to the second level.
5998 \begin_layout Enumerate
5999 Back to the outermost level.
6002 \begin_layout Standard
6003 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6007 environment, see section
6008 \begin_inset space ~
6012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6014 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6019 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6023 \begin_layout Standard
6024 There is more to nesting
6028 environments than we've stated here.
6029 You should read section
6030 \begin_inset space ~
6034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6036 reference "sec:Nesting"
6040 to learn more about nesting.
6043 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6045 \begin_inset Index idx
6048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6057 \begin_layout Standard
6058 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6062 list has no fixed label.
6063 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6072 of the first line as the label.
6076 \begin_layout Description
6077 Example: This is an example of the
6084 \begin_layout Standard
6086 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6090 \begin_layout Standard
6092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6099 it is meant that the first usage of the
6103 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6105 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6113 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6118 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6119 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6121 \begin_inset space ~
6127 \begin_inset space ~
6131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6133 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6137 for more information.) Here is an example:
6140 \begin_layout Description
6142 \begin_inset space ~
6145 Example: This one shows how to use a
6148 \begin_inset space ~
6160 \begin_layout Description
6161 Usage: You should use the
6165 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6166 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6168 It's not a good idea to use a
6172 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6173 You're better off using
6185 paragraphs into them.
6188 \begin_layout Description
6189 Nesting: You can nest
6193 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6197 \begin_layout Standard
6198 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6199 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6200 them from the first line.
6203 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6205 \begin_inset Index idx
6208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6217 \begin_layout Standard
6222 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6223 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6227 \begin_layout Standard
6236 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6238 Here are its properties:
6241 \begin_layout Labeling
6242 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6244 \begin_inset space ~
6247 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6256 of each line as the item label.
6261 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6262 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6263 space as described above.
6266 \begin_layout Labeling
6267 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6268 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6269 uses different margins for the item label and the
6270 body of the item text.
6271 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6272 label width plus a little extra space.
6276 \begin_layout Labeling
6277 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6279 \begin_inset space ~
6282 width \SpecialChar LyX
6283 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6284 If the label width is larger, the label
6285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6292 into the first line.
6293 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6294 margin of the rest of the item text.
6297 \begin_layout Labeling
6298 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6300 \begin_inset space ~
6303 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6308 environment has the same left margin.
6309 \begin_inset Newline newline
6312 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6315 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6317 \begin_inset space ~
6322 dialog (toolbar button
6325 arg "layout-paragraph"
6332 \begin_inset space ~
6337 determines the default label width.
6338 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6347 multiple times instead.
6348 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6358 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6361 \begin_inset space ~
6366 every time you alter a label in a
6371 \begin_inset Newline newline
6374 The predefined default width is the length of
6375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6383 \begin_inset space ~
6389 \begin_layout Standard
6394 list the same way as the
6398 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6404 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6408 \begin_layout Standard
6413 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6414 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6416 \begin_inset space ~
6420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6422 reference "sec:Nesting"
6426 to learn about nesting.
6429 \begin_layout Standard
6430 There is yet another feature of the
6434 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6435 left-justifies the item labels by
6437 You can use additional
6441 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6442 justifies the item label.
6447 are documented in section
6448 \begin_inset space ~
6452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6454 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6459 Here are some examples:
6462 \begin_layout Labeling
6463 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6464 Left The default for
6471 \begin_layout Labeling
6472 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6473 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6480 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6483 \begin_layout Labeling
6484 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6485 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6489 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6496 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6499 \begin_layout Subsection
6501 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6503 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6508 \begin_inset Index idx
6511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6520 \begin_layout Standard
6521 The features described in this section require that the module
6523 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6525 is loaded in the document settings.
6526 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6532 \begin_inset Index idx
6535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6537 -packages ! enumitem
6545 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6546 Custom Enumerate Lists
6547 \begin_inset Index idx
6550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6551 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6559 \begin_layout Standard
6561 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6564 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6567 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6568 There you add the command
6571 \begin_layout Standard
6579 \begin_layout Standard
6591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6592 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6593 Code, look at section
6594 \begin_inset space ~
6598 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6600 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6613 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6620 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6621 For capital Roman numerals replace
6633 in the command above.
6634 For Arabic numerals use
6642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6649 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6664 \begin_layout Standard
6666 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6674 You can only number 26
6675 \begin_inset space ~
6678 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6686 \begin_layout Standard
6687 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6688 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6691 \begin_layout Standard
6692 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6695 \begin_layout Enumerate
6696 \begin_inset Argument 1
6699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6725 \begin_layout Enumerate
6726 \begin_inset Argument 1
6729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6752 \begin_layout Enumerate
6757 \begin_layout Enumerate
6758 \begin_inset Argument 1
6761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6785 \begin_layout Enumerate
6786 \begin_inset Argument 1
6789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6815 \begin_layout Standard
6816 For this list these commands were used:
6819 \begin_layout Standard
6830 \begin_inset Newline newline
6838 \begin_inset Newline newline
6846 \begin_inset Newline newline
6856 \begin_layout Standard
6863 makes the label emphasized and
6872 \begin_layout Standard
6873 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6881 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6882 lists until you change the definition.
6890 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6892 \begin_inset Index idx
6895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6896 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6904 \begin_layout Standard
6905 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6908 \begin_layout Enumerate
6909 \begin_inset Argument 1
6912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6931 \begin_inset Note Note
6934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6935 goes back to default numbering
6943 \begin_layout Enumerate
6947 \begin_layout Standard
6951 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6955 \begin_layout Standard
6956 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6961 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
6962 to indicate that it is a resumed
6963 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
6964 , but in the output.
6967 \begin_layout Standard
6968 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6976 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
6985 \begin_layout Standard
6986 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6988 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6989 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6990 of a normal enumeration.
6991 There, insert the command
6994 \begin_layout Standard
7000 \begin_layout Standard
7005 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7009 \begin_layout Enumerate
7013 \begin_layout Enumerate
7017 \begin_layout Standard
7018 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7021 \begin_layout Enumerate
7022 \begin_inset Argument 1
7025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7041 This enumeration starts at 4
7044 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7046 \begin_inset Index idx
7049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7058 \begin_layout Standard
7059 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7061 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7064 \begin_layout Itemize
7068 \begin_layout Itemize
7069 with standard spacing
7072 \begin_layout Standard
7073 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7075 Add there the command
7079 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7082 \begin_layout Itemize
7083 \begin_inset Argument 1
7086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7105 \begin_layout Itemize
7109 \begin_layout Itemize
7113 \begin_layout Standard
7114 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7121 \begin_inset Index idx
7124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7126 -packages ! enumitem
7132 For more information see its documentation,
7133 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7142 \begin_layout Standard
7143 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7145 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7146 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7147 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7150 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7153 \begin_layout Enumerate
7154 \begin_inset Argument 1
7157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7165 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7178 \begin_layout Enumerate
7179 with negative indentation
7182 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7183 Further Customization
7184 \begin_inset Index idx
7187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7188 Lists ! Customization
7196 \begin_layout Standard
7197 You can also change the style of description lists.
7201 \begin_layout Standard
7207 \begin_layout Standard
7208 changes the description label font, the command
7211 \begin_layout Standard
7217 \begin_layout Standard
7218 sets the list style.
7221 \begin_layout Standard
7222 An example where the command
7225 \begin_layout Standard
7230 itshape, style=nextline
7233 \begin_layout Standard
7237 \begin_layout Description
7239 \begin_inset space ~
7243 \begin_inset Argument 1
7246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7252 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7254 itshape, style=nextline
7264 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7265 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7269 \begin_layout Description
7271 \begin_inset space ~
7274 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7275 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7276 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7279 \begin_layout Standard
7280 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7286 \begin_inset Index idx
7289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7291 -packages ! enumitem
7297 For more information see its documentation
7298 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7307 \begin_layout Subsection
7309 \begin_inset Index idx
7312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7321 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7323 \begin_inset space ~
7326 Address: An Overview
7329 \begin_layout Standard
7330 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7331 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7339 \begin_inset space ~
7345 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7346 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7347 gags on the document.
7348 In contrast, you can use the
7355 \begin_inset space ~
7360 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7361 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7365 \begin_layout Standard
7366 Of course, you're not limited to using
7373 \begin_inset space ~
7382 \begin_inset space ~
7387 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7388 some European academic papers.
7391 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7393 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7395 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7402 \begin_layout Standard
7407 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7408 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7412 \begin_inset space ~
7417 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7418 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7419 Here's an example of each:
7422 \begin_layout Right Address
7424 \begin_inset Newline newline
7428 \begin_inset Newline newline
7432 \begin_inset Newline newline
7435 When is it? What is today?
7438 \begin_layout Standard
7442 \begin_inset space ~
7448 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7450 the largest block of text on a single line.
7451 Here's an example of the
7458 \begin_layout Address
7460 \begin_inset Newline newline
7463 Where do I send this
7464 \begin_inset Newline newline
7467 Your post office and country
7470 \begin_layout Standard
7471 As you can see, both
7478 \begin_inset space ~
7483 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7488 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7489 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7495 This makes sense, since
7503 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7504 Thus, you have to use
7511 arg "newline-insert newline"
7516 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7517 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7519 \begin_inset space ~
7523 \begin_inset space ~
7528 ) to start a new line in an
7535 \begin_inset space ~
7543 \begin_layout Subsection
7547 \begin_layout Standard
7548 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7549 or list of references.
7551 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7554 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7556 \begin_inset Index idx
7559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7568 \begin_layout Standard
7573 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7574 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7575 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7576 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7590 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7591 The book document classes ignores the
7595 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7599 in a letter document class.
7602 \begin_layout Standard
7607 environment does several things for you.
7608 First, it puts the centered label
7609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7617 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7619 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7620 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7621 the subsequent text.
7622 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7624 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7628 \begin_layout Standard
7629 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7633 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7634 The new paragraph will still be in the
7639 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7640 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7643 \begin_layout Standard
7644 \begin_inset Float figure
7649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7651 \begin_inset Graphics
7652 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7660 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7663 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7665 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7686 \begin_layout Standard
7687 We would love to demonstrate the
7691 environment, but since this document is in the
7692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7699 class, we can't do this.
7700 We inserted it therefore as figure
7701 \begin_inset space ~
7705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7707 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7712 If you have never heard of an
7713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7720 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7723 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7725 \begin_inset Index idx
7728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7735 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7737 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7744 \begin_layout Standard
7749 environment is used to list references.
7750 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7751 only use it at the end of the document.
7763 \begin_layout Standard
7764 When you first open a
7768 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7769 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7785 depending on the document class.
7786 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7787 Each paragraph of the
7791 environment is a bibliography entry.
7796 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7797 Each new paragraph is still in the
7804 \begin_layout Standard
7805 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7806 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7808 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7810 handling, have a look at section
7811 \begin_inset space ~
7815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7817 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7824 \begin_layout Subsection
7825 Special Environments
7828 \begin_layout Standard
7830 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7831 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7834 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7839 \begin_inset Index idx
7842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7850 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7852 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7859 \begin_layout Standard
7865 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7867 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7872 key as a fixed whitespace.
7876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7889 \begin_inset space ~
7894 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7908 are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
7911 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7914 arg "newline-insert newline"
7931 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7932 So, when you finish using the
7937 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7938 Also, you can nest the
7943 environment inside of others.
7946 \begin_layout Standard
7947 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7950 \begin_layout Itemize
7954 arg "newline-insert newline"
7957 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7958 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7962 \begin_inset space \space{}
7972 arg "newline-insert newline"
7978 \begin_layout Itemize
7982 arg "newline-insert newline"
7992 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7998 \begin_layout Itemize
7999 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8000 You must put at least one
8004 in any line you want blank.
8005 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8009 \begin_layout Itemize
8010 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8014 since that will insert
8019 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8022 arg "self-insert \""
8028 \begin_layout Standard
8032 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8036 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8040 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8044 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8048 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8049 printf("Hello World!
8054 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8058 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8062 \begin_layout Standard
8063 This is just the standard
8064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8075 \begin_layout Standard
8081 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8083 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8084 as if you used a typewriter.
8085 \begin_inset Index idx
8088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8089 Paragraph environments|)
8094 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8097 Program Code Listings
8102 \begin_inset space ~
8110 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8114 \begin_inset Index idx
8117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8126 \begin_layout Standard
8131 environment is similar to the
8136 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8137 computer console text.
8142 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8156 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8157 you can have empty lines.
8170 \begin_layout Itemize
8171 have a certain language and a text style
8174 \begin_layout Itemize
8175 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8176 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8177 and \SpecialChar TeX
8181 \begin_layout Standard
8182 Because of these properties
8186 works like a typewriter.
8190 \begin_layout Verbatim
8194 \begin_layout Verbatim
8197 The following 2 lines are empty:
8200 \begin_layout Verbatim
8204 \begin_layout Verbatim
8208 \begin_layout Verbatim
8209 Almost everything is allowed in verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8214 \begin_layout Section
8215 Nesting Environments
8216 \begin_inset Index idx
8219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8220 Nesting ! Environments
8226 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8235 \begin_layout Subsection
8239 \begin_layout Standard
8241 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8243 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8245 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8247 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8259 \begin_layout Enumerate
8263 \begin_layout Enumerate
8268 \begin_layout Enumerate
8272 \begin_layout Enumerate
8277 \begin_layout Enumerate
8281 \begin_layout Standard
8282 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8283 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8285 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8287 \begin_inset space ~
8291 \begin_inset space ~
8299 \begin_inset space ~
8303 \begin_inset space ~
8308 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8310 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8313 arg "depth-increment"
8319 arg "depth-decrement"
8333 arg "depth-increment"
8339 arg "depth-decrement"
8343 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8344 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8348 \begin_layout Standard
8349 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8350 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8351 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8352 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8353 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8356 \begin_layout Standard
8357 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8359 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8361 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8364 \begin_layout Subsection
8365 What You Can and Can't Nest
8368 \begin_layout Standard
8369 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8370 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8373 \begin_layout Standard
8374 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8375 than a simple yes or no.
8376 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8379 \begin_layout Itemize
8380 Completely unnestable
8383 \begin_layout Itemize
8384 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8388 \begin_layout Itemize
8389 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8393 \begin_layout Standard
8394 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8395 environments have them:
8398 \begin_layout Description
8399 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8400 Can't nest into them.
8404 \begin_layout Itemize
8410 \begin_layout Itemize
8416 \begin_layout Itemize
8422 \begin_layout Itemize
8428 \begin_layout Itemize
8435 \begin_layout Description
8437 \begin_inset space ~
8440 Nestable You can nest them.
8441 You can nest other things into them.
8445 \begin_layout Itemize
8451 \begin_layout Itemize
8457 \begin_layout Itemize
8463 \begin_layout Itemize
8469 \begin_layout Itemize
8475 \begin_layout Itemize
8481 \begin_layout Itemize
8487 \begin_layout Itemize
8494 \begin_layout Itemize
8501 \begin_layout Description
8502 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8503 You can't nest anything into them.
8507 \begin_layout Itemize
8513 \begin_layout Itemize
8519 \begin_layout Itemize
8525 \begin_layout Itemize
8531 \begin_layout Itemize
8537 \begin_layout Itemize
8543 \begin_layout Itemize
8549 \begin_layout Itemize
8555 \begin_layout Itemize
8561 \begin_layout Itemize
8567 \begin_layout Itemize
8573 \begin_layout Itemize
8579 \begin_layout Itemize
8585 \begin_layout Itemize
8589 \begin_inset space ~
8595 \begin_layout Itemize
8602 \begin_layout Standard
8603 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8611 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8621 \begin_inset space ~
8624 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8625 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8626 nested section headings violate this.
8634 \begin_layout Subsection
8635 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8636 \begin_inset Index idx
8639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8640 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8648 \begin_layout Standard
8649 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8650 affected by nesting anyhow.
8654 \begin_layout Itemize
8658 \begin_layout Itemize
8662 \begin_layout Itemize
8666 \begin_layout Standard
8668 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8676 Figures and tables in
8680 are not affected by this.
8685 Have a look at section
8686 \begin_inset space ~
8690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8692 reference "sec:Floats"
8696 for more information about
8703 \begin_layout Standard
8705 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8706 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8710 \begin_layout Standard
8711 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8712 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8719 of its own, it behaves just like a
8720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8727 paragraph environment.
8728 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8732 \begin_layout Standard
8733 Here's an example with a table:
8736 \begin_layout Enumerate
8741 \begin_layout Enumerate
8742 This is (a) and it's nested.
8746 \begin_layout Standard
8747 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8753 \begin_layout Standard
8755 \begin_inset Tabular
8756 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8757 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8758 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8759 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8843 \begin_layout Standard
8844 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8851 \begin_layout Enumerate
8853 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8857 \begin_layout Enumerate
8861 \begin_layout Standard
8862 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8865 \begin_layout Enumerate
8870 \begin_layout Enumerate
8871 This is (a) and it's nested.
8875 \begin_layout Standard
8876 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8882 \begin_layout Standard
8884 \begin_inset Tabular
8885 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8886 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8887 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8888 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8972 \begin_layout Standard
8973 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8979 \begin_layout Enumerate
8986 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8989 \begin_layout Enumerate
8993 \begin_layout Standard
8994 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
8998 \begin_layout Standard
8999 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9002 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9005 \begin_layout Enumerate
9010 \begin_layout Enumerate
9011 This is (a) and it's nested.
9014 \begin_layout Standard
9015 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9021 \begin_layout Standard
9023 \begin_inset Tabular
9024 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9025 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9026 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9027 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9112 \begin_layout Standard
9113 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9119 \begin_layout Enumerate
9121 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9128 \begin_layout Enumerate
9132 \begin_layout Standard
9133 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9139 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9140 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9144 \begin_layout Subsection
9145 Usage and General Features
9148 \begin_layout Standard
9149 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9150 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9159 is the innermost possible depth.
9160 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9163 \begin_layout Enumerate
9164 level #1 – outermost
9168 \begin_layout Enumerate
9173 \begin_layout Enumerate
9178 \begin_layout Enumerate
9183 \begin_layout Itemize
9188 \begin_layout Itemize
9197 \begin_layout Standard
9198 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9199 both of them in the example.
9200 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9210 For example, if we tried to nest another
9215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9222 , we would get errors.
9225 \begin_layout Subsection
9227 \begin_inset Index idx
9230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9239 \begin_layout Standard
9240 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9241 We have several examples of nested environments.
9242 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9246 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9247 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9250 \begin_layout Labeling
9251 \labelwidthstring MMM
9252 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9261 \begin_layout Labeling
9262 \labelwidthstring MMM
9263 #2-a This is level #2.
9264 We created it by using
9267 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9273 arg "depth-increment"
9280 \begin_layout Labeling
9281 \labelwidthstring MMM
9282 #3-a This is level #3.
9283 This time, we just enter
9290 arg "depth-increment"
9294 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9298 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9304 arg "depth-increment"
9311 \begin_layout Standard
9316 environment, nested inside of
9317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9325 So, it's at level #4.
9326 We did this by entering
9329 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9335 arg "depth-increment"
9338 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9343 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9359 \begin_layout Standard
9364 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9367 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9373 \begin_layout Labeling
9374 \labelwidthstring MMM
9375 #4-a This is level #4.
9379 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9382 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9387 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9391 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9396 keep nesting things inside
9397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9408 \begin_layout Labeling
9409 \labelwidthstring MMM
9410 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9415 \begin_layout Labeling
9416 \labelwidthstring MMM
9417 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9418 and this is level #6.
9419 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9423 \begin_layout Labeling
9424 \labelwidthstring MMM
9425 #5-b Back to level #5.
9429 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9435 arg "depth-decrement"
9442 \begin_layout Labeling
9443 \labelwidthstring MMM
9447 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9453 arg "depth-decrement"
9456 , we're back at level #4.
9460 \begin_layout Labeling
9461 \labelwidthstring MMM
9462 #3-b Back to level #3.
9463 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9467 \begin_layout Labeling
9468 \labelwidthstring MMM
9469 #2-b Back to level #2.
9474 \begin_layout Labeling
9475 \labelwidthstring MMM
9476 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9477 After this sentence, we will enter
9481 and change the paragraph environment back to
9488 \begin_layout Standard
9489 We could have also used the
9505 environment in place of the
9510 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9513 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9514 Example 2: Inheritance
9517 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9518 This is the \SpecialChar LyX
9519 -Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9522 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9531 arg "depth-increment"
9535 \begin_inset Newline newline
9538 which, we will change to the
9546 \begin_layout Enumerate
9551 environment, at level #2.
9554 \begin_layout Enumerate
9555 Notice how the nested
9559 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9564 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9568 \begin_layout Standard
9569 We ended this example by entering
9574 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9578 and reset the nesting depth by using
9581 arg "depth-decrement"
9587 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9588 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9597 \begin_inset Argument 1
9600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9601 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9609 \begin_layout Enumerate
9610 This is level #1, in an
9614 paragraph environment.
9615 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9619 \begin_layout Enumerate
9624 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9630 arg "depth-increment"
9634 Now, what happens if we nest an
9638 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9639 label be? An asterisk?
9643 \begin_layout Itemize
9653 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9654 So, its label is a bullet.
9655 (We got here by using
9658 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9664 arg "depth-increment"
9667 , then changing the environment to
9675 \begin_layout Itemize
9676 Here's level #4, produced using
9679 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9685 arg "depth-increment"
9689 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9694 \begin_layout Enumerate
9697 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9702 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9706 , because we are in the
9714 environment (that is, it is an
9729 \begin_layout Enumerate
9734 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9735 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9739 \begin_layout Enumerate
9740 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9743 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9746 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9749 \begin_layout Enumerate
9753 arg "depth-decrement"
9756 to decrease the depth after the next
9759 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9766 \begin_layout Enumerate
9768 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9773 \begin_layout Enumerate
9775 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9776 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9780 \begin_layout Enumerate
9781 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9790 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9795 reset the counter for the label.
9799 \begin_layout Enumerate
9803 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9809 arg "depth-decrement"
9812 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9813 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9814 into the twofold-nested
9822 \begin_layout Enumerate
9823 The same thing happens if we do another
9826 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9832 arg "depth-decrement"
9835 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9838 \begin_layout Standard
9839 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9844 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9859 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
9866 The same rule applies for the
9870 environment, as well.
9873 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9874 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9877 \begin_layout Enumerate
9878 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9879 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9880 the same detail with how we did it.
9889 \begin_layout Standard
9897 arg "depth-increment"
9904 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9905 the example in parentheses someplace.
9906 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9907 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9908 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9912 \begin_layout Enumerate
9917 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9922 Now we will add verse.
9923 \begin_inset Newline newline
9926 It will get much worse.
9927 \begin_inset Newline newline
9937 arg "depth-increment"
9948 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9949 \begin_inset Newline newline
9952 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9953 \begin_inset Newline newline
9959 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9972 \begin_layout Standard
9973 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9979 \begin_layout Standard
9981 \begin_inset Tabular
9982 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9983 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9984 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9985 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10070 \begin_layout Verse
10074 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10084 arg "depth-increment"
10090 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10096 \begin_inset Newline newline
10104 arg "depth-decrement"
10111 \begin_layout Enumerate
10116 : level #1) This is another item.
10117 Note that selecting a
10121 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10122 3 times to put the table inside the
10130 \begin_layout Quotation
10131 We're now ending the
10135 list and changing to
10140 We're still at level #1.
10141 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10142 The next set of paragraphs is a
10143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10150 We will nest both the
10157 \begin_inset space ~
10162 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10166 for the letter body.
10170 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10173 to preserve the depth.
10174 Remember that you need to use
10177 arg "newline-insert newline"
10180 to create multiple lines inside the
10187 \begin_inset space ~
10197 \begin_layout Right Address
10199 \begin_inset Newline newline
10202 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10203 \begin_inset Newline newline
10209 \begin_layout Address
10211 \begin_inset space ~
10217 \begin_layout Quotation
10218 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10219 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10222 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10223 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10224 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10225 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10226 as soon as possible.
10227 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10230 \begin_layout Quotation
10231 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10232 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10233 with your order, along with payment.
10236 \begin_layout Quotation
10237 We thank you again for your patience.
10240 \begin_layout Address
10242 \begin_inset Newline newline
10249 \begin_layout Quotation
10250 That ends that example!
10253 \begin_layout Standard
10254 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10255 gives you a lot of power with just
10257 We could have easily nested an
10278 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10281 \begin_layout Subsection
10283 \begin_inset Index idx
10286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10287 Nesting ! Separation
10293 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10295 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10302 \begin_layout Standard
10303 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10305 For example you need two different enumerations:
10308 \begin_layout Enumerate
10313 \begin_layout Enumerate
10318 \begin_layout Enumerate
10322 \begin_layout Standard
10323 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10329 \begin_layout Itemize
10335 \begin_layout Standard
10336 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10342 \begin_layout Enumerate
10346 \begin_layout Enumerate
10350 \begin_layout Enumerate
10354 \begin_layout Standard
10355 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10356 list item and use the menu
10358 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10359 Start New Environment
10362 This inserts a plain separator (red line in LyX) and behind it the new
10364 Alternatively set the cursor at the end of a list item and press
10367 arg "paragraph-break"
10371 This inserts a paragraph separator (red arrow in LyX).
10372 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10373 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10374 One can change the separator type by right-clicking on it.
10377 \begin_layout Standard
10378 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10381 arg "paragraph-break"
10384 in a Standard environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10387 \begin_layout Section
10388 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10389 \begin_inset Index idx
10392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10401 \begin_layout Standard
10402 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10403 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10405 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10406 be broken at the end of a line.
10407 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10411 \begin_layout Subsection
10413 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10415 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10420 \begin_inset Index idx
10423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10432 \begin_layout Standard
10433 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10434 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10435 ) not to break the line at
10437 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10440 \begin_layout Quote
10441 Further documentation is given in section
10442 \begin_inset Newline newline
10446 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10448 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10456 \begin_layout Standard
10457 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10472 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10481 A protected space is set with
10483 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10484 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10486 \begin_inset space ~
10494 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10500 \begin_layout Subsection
10502 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10504 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10509 \begin_inset Index idx
10512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10513 Spacing ! Horizontal
10521 \begin_layout Standard
10522 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10524 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10525 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10529 The length units are listed in Appendix
10530 \begin_inset space ~
10534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10536 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10543 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10545 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10547 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10552 \begin_inset Index idx
10555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10556 Spaces ! Inter-word
10564 \begin_layout Standard
10565 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10566 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10567 at the ends of sentences.
10568 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10569 automatically takes care about this.
10570 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10571 followed by a period; see section
10572 \begin_inset space ~
10576 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10578 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10583 To insert a normal space, select
10585 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10586 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10588 \begin_inset space ~
10596 arg "space-insert normal"
10602 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10604 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10606 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10611 \begin_inset Index idx
10614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10623 \begin_layout Standard
10625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10632 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10641 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10642 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10643 inside abbreviations:
10646 \begin_layout Quote
10648 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10652 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10655 \begin_layout Standard
10656 or between values and units.
10657 Compare for example this:
10658 \begin_inset Newline newline
10662 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10666 \begin_inset Newline newline
10669 10 kg (normal space
10672 \begin_layout Standard
10673 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10675 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10676 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10678 \begin_inset space ~
10686 arg "space-insert thin"
10692 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10696 \begin_layout Standard
10697 You can also insert the following space types:
10700 \begin_layout Description
10702 \begin_inset space ~
10706 \begin_inset space ~
10709 space A line with a
10710 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10714 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10718 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10721 negative thin space between the arrows.
10724 \begin_layout Description
10726 \begin_inset space ~
10730 \begin_inset space ~
10733 space A line with a
10734 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10738 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10742 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10745 negative medium space between the arrows.
10748 \begin_layout Description
10750 \begin_inset space ~
10754 \begin_inset space ~
10757 space A line with a
10758 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10762 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10766 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10769 negative thick space between the arrows.
10772 \begin_layout Description
10774 \begin_inset space ~
10778 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10782 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10786 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10790 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10794 \begin_inset space ~
10798 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10801 em) space between the arrows.
10804 \begin_layout Description
10806 \begin_inset space ~
10810 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10814 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10818 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10822 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10826 \begin_inset space ~
10830 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10833 em) space between the arrows.
10836 \begin_layout Description
10838 \begin_inset space ~
10842 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10846 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10850 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10854 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10858 \begin_inset space ~
10862 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10865 em) space between the arrows.
10868 \begin_layout Description
10870 \begin_inset space ~
10874 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10878 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10883 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10887 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10890 cm space between the arrows.
10893 \begin_layout Standard
10895 \begin_inset space ~
10899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10901 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10905 lists the different space sizes.
10908 \begin_layout Standard
10909 \begin_inset Float table
10914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10915 \begin_inset Caption Standard
10917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10918 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10920 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10924 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10934 \begin_inset Tabular
10935 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
10936 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10937 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10938 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10978 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11002 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11026 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11050 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11054 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11058 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11082 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11106 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11121 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11134 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11149 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11162 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11177 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11190 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11211 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11213 \begin_inset Index idx
11216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11225 \begin_layout Standard
11226 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11227 feature for adding extra space
11228 in a uniform fashion.
11229 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11230 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11231 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11232 equally between themselves.
11235 \begin_layout Standard
11236 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11239 \begin_layout Quote
11241 This is on the left side
11242 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11245 This is on the right
11248 \begin_layout Quote
11251 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11255 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11261 \begin_layout Quote
11264 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11268 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11272 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11278 \begin_layout Standard
11279 That was an example in the
11285 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11289 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11293 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11296 is one in a standard paragraph.
11297 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11301 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11304 \begin_layout Standard
11305 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11308 \begin_inset space ~
11313 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11316 \begin_layout Standard
11318 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11322 \begin_inset space ~
11328 \begin_layout Standard
11330 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11334 \begin_inset space ~
11340 \begin_layout Standard
11342 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11346 \begin_inset space ~
11352 \begin_layout Standard
11354 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11358 \begin_inset space ~
11364 \begin_layout Standard
11366 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11370 \begin_inset space ~
11376 \begin_layout Standard
11378 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11382 \begin_inset space ~
11388 \begin_layout Standard
11389 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11397 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11401 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11403 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11404 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11408 option in the space dialog.
11416 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11418 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11420 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11425 \begin_inset Index idx
11428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11437 \begin_layout Standard
11438 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11439 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11442 \begin_layout Standard
11443 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11446 What is correct English?:
11447 \begin_inset Newline newline
11451 \begin_inset Newline newline
11455 \begin_inset space ~
11458 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11459 \begin_inset Newline newline
11463 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11474 \begin_inset Newline newline
11478 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11489 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11495 \begin_layout Standard
11497 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11502 \begin_inset space ~
11506 \begin_inset space ~
11510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11514 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11516 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11517 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11521 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11527 \begin_inset space ~
11531 \begin_inset space ~
11535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11538 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11547 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11548 That is why it is named
11549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11557 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11558 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11562 \begin_layout Subsection
11564 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11566 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11571 \begin_inset Index idx
11574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11583 \begin_layout Standard
11584 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11586 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11587 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11589 \begin_inset space ~
11595 There you find the following sizes:
11598 \begin_layout Standard
11611 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11612 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11617 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11619 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11620 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11622 \begin_inset space ~
11628 \begin_inset Index idx
11631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11632 Document ! Settings
11637 for the paragraph separation.
11638 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11649 \begin_layout Standard
11655 \begin_inset Index idx
11658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11664 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11665 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11670 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11671 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11680 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11689 s are described in section
11690 \begin_inset space ~
11694 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11696 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11705 If there are several
11709 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11710 You can therefore use
11714 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11717 \begin_layout Standard
11722 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11723 \begin_inset space ~
11727 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11729 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11736 \begin_layout Standard
11737 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11747 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11748 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11760 \begin_layout Subsection
11761 Paragraph Alignment
11762 \begin_inset Index idx
11765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11766 Paragraph ! Alignment
11774 \begin_layout Standard
11775 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11777 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11780 dialog (toolbar button
11783 arg "layout-paragraph"
11787 There are five possibilities:
11790 \begin_layout Itemize
11798 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11804 \begin_layout Itemize
11812 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11818 \begin_layout Itemize
11826 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11832 \begin_layout Itemize
11840 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11846 \begin_layout Itemize
11854 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11860 \begin_layout Standard
11861 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11862 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11863 the left and right margins.
11864 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11867 \begin_layout Standard
11869 This paragraph is right aligned,
11872 \begin_layout Standard
11874 this one is centered,
11877 \begin_layout Standard
11879 this one is left aligned.
11882 \begin_layout Subsection
11884 \begin_inset Index idx
11887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11888 Page breaks ! Forced
11894 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11896 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11903 \begin_layout Standard
11904 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
11905 does the page breaks in your document, you can
11906 force a page break where you want one.
11907 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
11908 is good at page breaking.
11909 Only if you use a lot of
11913 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
11914 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11917 \begin_layout Standard
11918 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11919 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11923 have to change the page breaking.
11926 \begin_layout Standard
11927 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11929 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11931 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11932 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11934 \begin_inset space ~
11940 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11942 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11943 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11945 \begin_inset space ~
11950 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11952 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11953 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11956 \begin_layout Standard
11957 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11958 at the top of a page.
11959 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11961 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11962 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11963 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11965 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11967 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11971 to learn more about
11978 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11980 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11982 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11987 \begin_inset Index idx
11990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11991 Page breaks ! Clear
11999 \begin_layout Standard
12000 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12001 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12002 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12003 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12004 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12007 \begin_layout Standard
12008 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12010 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12011 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12013 \begin_inset space ~
12019 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12021 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12022 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12024 \begin_inset space ~
12028 \begin_inset space ~
12033 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12034 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12037 \begin_layout Subsection
12039 \begin_inset Index idx
12042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12049 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12051 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12058 \begin_layout Standard
12059 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12061 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12063 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12064 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12066 \begin_inset space ~
12070 \begin_inset space ~
12078 arg "newline-insert newline"
12082 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12084 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12085 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12087 \begin_inset space ~
12091 \begin_inset space ~
12099 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12102 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12104 This is useful to avoid
12105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12109 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12112 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12115 \begin_layout Standard
12116 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12117 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12119 very good at line breaking.
12120 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
12121 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12122 \begin_inset space ~
12126 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12128 reference "sec:Quote"
12133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12135 reference "sec:Verse"
12140 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12142 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12149 \begin_layout Subsection
12151 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12153 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12158 \begin_inset Index idx
12161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12170 \begin_layout Standard
12172 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12183 \begin_layout Standard
12187 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12188 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12190 \begin_inset space ~
12195 you can insert horizontal lines.
12196 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12197 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12198 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12201 \begin_layout Standard
12203 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12214 \begin_layout Section
12215 Characters and Symbols
12218 \begin_layout Standard
12219 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12220 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12221 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12223 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12229 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12233 for information on how this is done.
12236 \begin_layout Standard
12237 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12242 dialog via the menu
12244 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12245 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12251 \begin_layout Standard
12252 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12260 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12261 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12263 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12271 \begin_layout Section
12272 Fonts and Text Styles
12273 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12275 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12282 \begin_layout Subsection
12284 \begin_inset Index idx
12287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12296 \begin_layout Standard
12297 There are two types of fonts:
12300 \begin_layout Description
12302 \begin_inset space ~
12306 \begin_inset Index idx
12309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12315 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12316 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12320 characters) in the font.
12321 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12322 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12323 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12324 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12325 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12326 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12327 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12328 \begin_inset Newline newline
12331 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12332 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12333 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12334 sizes than at small ones.
12335 \begin_inset Newline newline
12349 \begin_inset space ~
12357 \begin_layout Description
12359 \begin_inset space ~
12363 \begin_inset Index idx
12366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12372 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12373 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12374 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12375 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12376 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12377 image manipulation program.
12378 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12379 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12380 \begin_inset space ~
12383 pixels high up to 34
12384 \begin_inset space ~
12387 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12388 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12389 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12391 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12392 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12393 \begin_inset Newline newline
12396 Bitmap fonts are named
12399 \begin_inset space ~
12404 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12407 \begin_layout Standard
12408 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12409 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12410 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12411 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12412 use scalable fonts.
12415 \begin_layout Standard
12416 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12419 \begin_layout Standard
12420 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12421 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12422 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12423 font to emphasize text, you use an
12424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12432 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12434 In \SpecialChar LyX
12435 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12439 \begin_layout Subsection
12442 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12444 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12451 \begin_layout Standard
12452 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12453 used its own fonts.
12454 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12455 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12458 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12459 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12460 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12461 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12462 to a word processor.
12463 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12464 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12465 files are very portable across
12466 different machines.
12467 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12468 has increased a lot
12469 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12472 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12474 \begin_inset space ~
12478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12480 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12485 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12486 code in the document
12487 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12490 \begin_layout Standard
12491 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12492 engines that are also able directly
12493 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12495 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12497 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12499 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12500 that is installed on your system.
12501 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12504 \begin_layout Standard
12505 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12513 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12514 es; so you might have to experiment.
12522 \begin_layout Standard
12523 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12532 and especially Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12533 , are still rather new and thus not as mature as tradition
12534 al \SpecialChar LaTeX
12535 or PDF\SpecialChar TeX
12544 \begin_layout Subsection
12545 Document Font and Font size
12546 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12548 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12553 \begin_inset Index idx
12556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12563 \begin_inset Index idx
12566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12575 \begin_layout Standard
12576 You can set the document fonts in the
12578 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12582 \begin_inset Index idx
12585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12586 Document ! Settings
12596 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12597 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12600 \begin_inset space ~
12609 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12611 \begin_inset space ~
12614 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12617 \begin_layout Standard
12624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12633 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12634 This requires that you use
12640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12679 as the output format, i.
12680 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12684 \begin_inset space \space{}
12687 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12688 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12689 installed (see section
12690 \begin_inset space ~
12694 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12696 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12701 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12703 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12704 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12706 \begin_inset space ~
12709 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12710 cannot determine the family.
12711 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12712 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12715 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12718 \begin_layout Standard
12719 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12720 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12725 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12731 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12732 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12740 \begin_inset space ~
12746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12759 European Computer Modern
12762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12769 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12772 \begin_layout Standard
12781 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12782 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12787 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12790 \begin_inset space ~
12795 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12801 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12802 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12805 \begin_layout Itemize
12809 \begin_inset space ~
12814 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12827 \begin_inset space ~
12832 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12833 community in order to replace
12837 as the default font.
12838 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12839 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12842 \begin_inset space ~
12855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12856 One difference is improved kerning.
12864 \begin_layout Itemize
12868 \begin_inset space ~
12872 \begin_inset space ~
12877 fonts in (the rare) case that
12880 \begin_inset space ~
12885 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12900 Virtual means that it
12901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12912 -glyphs from other fonts.
12913 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12923 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12935 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12941 \begin_inset Index idx
12944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12946 -packages ! aeguill
12951 with the document preamble line
12952 \begin_inset Newline newline
12959 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12960 \begin_inset Newline newline
12965 will fix the guillemet problem.
12970 and that accented characters are not
12974 glyph, but built of
12978 characters, the accent and the letter.
12979 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12985 If you search for example for the French word
12986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12993 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13002 and not for the glyph
13003 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13007 \begin_inset space ~
13011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13017 \begin_layout Itemize
13018 If you do not like the look of
13026 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13027 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13031 \begin_inset space ~
13037 \begin_inset space ~
13047 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13048 \begin_inset space ~
13051 serif and typewriter fonts,
13055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13056 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13057 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13063 \begin_inset space ~
13072 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13073 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13077 \begin_inset space \space{}
13085 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13089 \begin_inset space \space{}
13095 \begin_inset space ~
13103 \begin_inset space ~
13113 but you can also select your own.
13114 \begin_inset Newline newline
13117 The differences between roman,
13120 \begin_inset space ~
13129 fonts are explained in section
13130 \begin_inset space ~
13134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13136 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13141 \begin_inset Newline newline
13147 \begin_inset space ~
13152 was originally designed for newspapers.
13153 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13154 into the small newspaper columns.
13158 \begin_inset space ~
13163 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13166 \begin_layout Standard
13167 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13180 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13185 depends on the class you are using.
13186 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13189 \begin_layout Standard
13190 Note that the font size is the
13195 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13196 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13197 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13198 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13201 \begin_inset space ~
13207 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13208 \begin_inset space ~
13212 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13214 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13221 \begin_layout Standard
13225 \begin_inset space ~
13230 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13232 \begin_inset space ~
13235 serif or typewriter.
13240 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13250 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13253 \begin_layout Standard
13262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13271 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13272 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13278 \begin_inset Index idx
13281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13283 -packages ! fontenc
13289 \begin_inset space ~
13293 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13295 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13300 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13301 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13308 \begin_layout Standard
13309 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13311 Use Old Style Figures
13315 Use True Small Caps
13318 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13321 Use Old Style Figures
13323 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13325 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13326 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13330 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13333 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13337 Use True Small Caps
13339 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13340 of scaled capitals.
13341 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13342 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13345 \begin_layout Standard
13350 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13351 a font to display the script characters.
13355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13356 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13362 \begin_inset Index idx
13365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13372 So this has no effect for the document language
13386 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13390 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13398 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13403 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13404 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13406 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13408 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13411 dialog, see section
13412 \begin_inset space ~
13416 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13418 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13430 \begin_layout Subsection
13434 \begin_layout Standard
13435 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13436 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13438 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13439 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13440 choose a math font in the dialog
13442 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13446 \begin_inset Index idx
13449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13450 Document ! Settings
13456 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13457 automatically selects a math font.
13458 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13459 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13468 \begin_inset space ~
13474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13479 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13480 document font is available.
13483 \begin_layout Standard
13484 Note that the math font will not be used for
13488 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13494 or by the insertion of the command
13501 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13502 \begin_inset space ~
13506 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13507 while the math characters do not.
13509 \begin_inset space ~
13512 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13515 \begin_inset space ~
13523 \begin_inset space ~
13528 in the document font settings.
13531 \begin_layout Standard
13532 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13533 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13534 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13535 font (in most cases
13536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13542 \begin_inset space ~
13548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13551 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13552 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13560 \begin_inset space ~
13566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13572 \begin_layout Subsection
13573 Using Different Character Styles
13574 \begin_inset Index idx
13577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13584 \begin_inset Index idx
13587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13596 \begin_layout Standard
13597 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13598 automatically changes the character style for certain
13599 paragraph environments.
13601 supports two character styles,
13610 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13614 \begin_layout Standard
13619 style, do one of the following:
13622 \begin_layout Itemize
13623 click on the toolbar button
13632 \begin_layout Itemize
13633 use the key binding
13642 \begin_layout Standard
13643 These commands are all toggles.
13648 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13651 \begin_layout Standard
13652 One typically uses the
13656 style for proper names.
13658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13665 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13673 \begin_layout Standard
13674 A more widely used character style is the
13679 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13686 \begin_layout Itemize
13687 clicking on the toolbar button
13696 \begin_layout Itemize
13697 using the keybindings
13706 \begin_layout Standard
13711 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13713 use a different font.
13716 \begin_layout Standard
13717 We've been using the
13721 style all over the place in this document.
13722 Here's one more example:
13725 \begin_layout Quotation
13728 Do not overuse character styles!
13731 \begin_layout Standard
13732 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13733 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13734 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13735 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13739 \begin_layout Standard
13740 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13748 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13750 \begin_inset space ~
13753 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13759 arg "dialog-show character"
13765 \begin_layout Subsection
13766 Fine-Tuning with the
13771 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13773 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13778 \begin_inset Index idx
13781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13790 \begin_layout Standard
13791 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13793 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13794 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13795 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13796 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13797 from ordinary dialog.
13800 \begin_layout Standard
13801 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13802 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13803 \begin_inset Newline newline
13806 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13807 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13810 \begin_layout Standard
13811 To use custom character styles, open the
13813 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13815 \begin_inset space ~
13818 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13821 dialog or press the toolbar button
13824 arg "dialog-show character"
13828 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13829 font property that you can choose.
13830 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13833 \begin_inset space ~
13838 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13843 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13844 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13845 environments all at once.
13848 \begin_layout Standard
13849 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13852 \begin_inset space ~
13864 \begin_layout Labeling
13865 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13879 The possible options are:
13883 \begin_layout Labeling
13884 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13889 This is the Roman font family.
13890 Normally a serif font.
13891 It's also the default family.
13901 \begin_layout Labeling
13902 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13906 \begin_inset space ~
13913 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13925 \begin_layout Labeling
13926 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13933 This is the Typewriter font family.
13939 arg "font-typewriter"
13948 \begin_layout Labeling
13949 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13954 This corresponds to the print weight.
13959 \begin_layout Labeling
13960 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13965 This is the Medium font series.
13966 It's also the default series.
13969 \begin_layout Labeling
13970 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13977 This is the Bold font series.
13990 \begin_layout Labeling
13991 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13996 As the name implies.
14001 \begin_layout Labeling
14002 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14007 This is the Upright font shape.
14008 It's also the default shape.
14011 \begin_layout Labeling
14012 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14026 s the Italic font shape
14032 \begin_layout Labeling
14033 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14040 This is the Slanted font shape
14042 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14043 , this is different from italic).
14046 \begin_layout Labeling
14047 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14051 \begin_inset space ~
14058 This is the Small caps font shape
14065 \begin_layout Labeling
14066 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14071 Alters the text color.
14072 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14076 \begin_inset space ~
14081 , which means that the document default color set in
14083 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14084 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14090 \begin_inset space ~
14095 is used, you can choose between
14128 \begin_inset Index idx
14131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14140 \begin_layout Labeling
14141 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14146 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14147 the language of the document.
14148 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14149 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14151 \begin_inset Newline newline
14154 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14156 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14157 When using the spell checking (see section
14158 \begin_inset space ~
14162 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14164 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14168 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14171 \begin_layout Labeling
14172 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14177 Alters the size of the font.
14178 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14179 proportional to the document font size.
14180 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14181 the details, but a general description of what
14187 \begin_layout Labeling
14188 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14209 arg "font-size tiny"
14215 \begin_layout Labeling
14216 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14237 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14243 \begin_layout Labeling
14244 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14265 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14271 \begin_layout Labeling
14272 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14293 arg "font-size small"
14299 \begin_layout Labeling
14300 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14306 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14314 It's also the default size.
14318 arg "font-size normal"
14324 \begin_layout Labeling
14325 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14346 arg "font-size large"
14352 \begin_layout Labeling
14353 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14374 arg "font-size larger"
14380 \begin_layout Labeling
14381 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14402 arg "font-size largest"
14408 \begin_layout Labeling
14409 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14430 arg "font-size huge"
14436 \begin_layout Labeling
14437 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14458 arg "font-size giant"
14464 \begin_layout Labeling
14465 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14470 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14490 arg "font-size increase"
14496 \begin_layout Labeling
14497 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14502 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14522 arg "font-size decrease"
14529 \begin_layout Standard
14534 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14535 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14537 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14538 — use those instead.
14539 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14542 \begin_layout Labeling
14543 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14548 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14553 \begin_layout Labeling
14554 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14561 This is text with emphasize on
14564 This might seem like the same as
14568 , but it is actually a bit different.
14574 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14576 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14579 \begin_layout Labeling
14580 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14587 This is text with Underbar on.
14593 arg "font-underline"
14599 \begin_inset Newline newline
14604 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14605 when you could not change fonts.
14606 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14607 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14608 because some people
14612 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14615 \begin_layout Labeling
14616 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14620 \begin_inset space ~
14627 This is text with Double underbar on.
14633 arg "font-underunderline"
14637 \begin_inset Newline newline
14640 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14641 about double underbar.
14644 \begin_layout Labeling
14645 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14649 \begin_inset space ~
14656 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14662 arg "font-underwave"
14666 \begin_inset Newline newline
14669 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14670 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14673 \begin_layout Labeling
14674 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14681 This is text with Strikeout on.
14687 arg "font-strikeout"
14691 \begin_inset Newline newline
14694 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14695 changed in the meantime.
14698 \begin_layout Labeling
14699 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14706 This is text with Noun on.
14713 , this is a logical attribute.
14714 Normally it's equivalent to
14717 \begin_inset space ~
14726 \begin_layout Standard
14727 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14728 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14730 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14732 \begin_inset space ~
14735 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14741 arg "dialog-show character"
14744 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14745 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14748 arg "textstyle-apply"
14752 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14756 \begin_layout Standard
14757 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14764 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14765 (suppose you just set the shape to
14766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14784 \begin_inset space ~
14796 \begin_layout Standard
14797 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14805 \begin_inset space ~
14817 \begin_layout Itemize
14823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14830 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14848 \begin_inset Newline newline
14852 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14866 \begin_inset Note Note
14869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14870 For more on phantoms see section
14871 \begin_inset space ~
14875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14877 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14887 \begin_inset Newline newline
14893 \begin_layout Itemize
14898 fonts use characters with serifs.
14899 These are the small
14900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14907 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14908 The following example shows the difference:
14909 \begin_inset Newline newline
14913 \begin_inset Newline newline
14918 text without serifs
14921 \begin_inset Newline newline
14924 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14925 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14932 \begin_layout Itemize
14937 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14938 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14939 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14942 \begin_layout Standard
14943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14950 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14951 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14954 \begin_inset space ~
14959 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14960 the property to be removed.
14961 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14962 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14963 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14981 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14982 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14990 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14994 \begin_inset space ~
14999 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15010 If you, for example, set
15011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15029 \begin_inset space ~
15034 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15043 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15046 \begin_layout Standard
15047 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15048 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15051 \begin_layout Section
15052 Printing and Previewing
15055 \begin_layout Subsection
15059 \begin_layout Standard
15060 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15061 using \SpecialChar LyX
15062 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15063 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15064 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15065 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15067 Additional Features
15072 \begin_layout Standard
15074 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15077 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15078 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15079 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15082 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15083 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15084 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15085 to turn your writing into printable output.
15086 This happens in two stages:
15089 \begin_layout Enumerate
15090 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15091 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15093 a file with the extension,
15094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15108 \begin_layout Enumerate
15109 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15110 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15111 to use the commands in the
15115 file to produce printable output.
15118 \begin_layout Subsection
15119 Output file formats
15120 \begin_inset Index idx
15123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15130 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15132 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15139 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15140 Simple text (ASCII)
15141 \begin_inset Index idx
15144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15145 File formats ! ASCII
15153 \begin_layout Standard
15154 This file type has the extension
15155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15167 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15171 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15172 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15178 \begin_layout Standard
15179 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15181 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15182 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15184 \begin_inset space ~
15190 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15191 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15192 bibliography (section
15193 \begin_inset space ~
15197 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15199 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15204 If your document includes such material, use
15206 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15207 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15209 \begin_inset space ~
15213 \begin_inset space ~
15217 \begin_inset space ~
15225 \begin_inset space ~
15229 \begin_inset space ~
15235 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15236 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15239 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15242 \begin_inset Index idx
15245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15246 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15255 \begin_layout Standard
15256 This file type has the extension
15257 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15268 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15271 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15272 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15273 -Errors or to process it manually
15274 with console commands.
15275 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15276 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15277 's temporary directory whenever you
15278 view or export your document.
15281 \begin_layout Standard
15282 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15283 -file using the menu
15285 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15286 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15301 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15302 export variants are explained in section
15303 \begin_inset space ~
15307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15309 reference "subsec:Export"
15316 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15318 \begin_inset Index idx
15321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15330 \begin_layout Standard
15331 This file type has the extension
15332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15352 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15353 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15354 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15358 \begin_layout Standard
15359 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15360 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15361 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15362 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15363 when you view the DVI.
15364 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15367 \begin_layout Standard
15368 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15370 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15371 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15376 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15377 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15379 \begin_inset space ~
15386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15396 The latter option uses the program
15398 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15404 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15407 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15408 font access (see section
15409 \begin_inset space ~
15413 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15415 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15420 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15421 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15426 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15428 \begin_inset Index idx
15431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15432 File formats ! PostScript
15440 \begin_layout Standard
15441 This file type has the extension
15442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15454 PostScript was developed by the company
15458 as a printer language.
15459 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15461 PostScript can be seen as a
15462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15465 programming language
15466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15469 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15474 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15481 \begin_inset Index idx
15484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15486 -packages ! pstricks
15496 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15499 \begin_layout Standard
15500 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15504 Encapsulated PostScript
15505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15508 (EPS, file extension
15509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15521 As \SpecialChar LyX
15522 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15523 convert them in the background to EPS.
15524 If, for example, you have 50
15525 \begin_inset space ~
15528 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15530 \begin_inset space ~
15533 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15534 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15536 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15537 EPS to avoid this problem.
15540 \begin_layout Standard
15541 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15543 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15544 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15550 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15552 \begin_inset Index idx
15555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15562 \begin_inset Index idx
15565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15574 \begin_layout Standard
15575 This file type has the extension
15576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15592 Portable Document Format
15593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15600 was derived from PostScript.
15601 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15610 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15611 looks exactly the same.
15614 \begin_layout Standard
15615 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15619 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15623 (JPG, file extension
15624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15651 Portable Network Graphics
15652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15655 (PNG, file extension
15656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15668 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15669 converts them in the
15670 background to one of these formats.
15671 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15672 will slow down your workflow.
15673 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15676 \begin_layout Standard
15677 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15679 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15685 \begin_layout Description
15687 \begin_inset space ~
15690 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15694 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15697 \begin_layout Description
15699 \begin_inset space ~
15706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15713 X) This uses the program
15715 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15718 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15721 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15724 is a new engine, derived from
15728 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15729 access (see section
15730 \begin_inset space ~
15734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15736 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15741 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15742 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15747 \begin_layout Description
15749 \begin_inset space ~
15756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15763 X) This uses the program
15768 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15774 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15775 font access (see section
15776 \begin_inset space ~
15780 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15782 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15787 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15788 vertically written Japanese.
15791 \begin_layout Description
15793 \begin_inset space ~
15796 (cropped) This is the same as
15799 \begin_inset space ~
15804 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15805 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15806 to generate good-looking
15807 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15810 \begin_layout Description
15812 \begin_inset space ~
15815 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15819 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15823 \begin_layout Description
15825 \begin_inset space ~
15828 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15832 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15833 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15837 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15838 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15841 \begin_layout Standard
15845 \begin_inset space ~
15854 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15855 works without problems.
15856 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15857 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15861 \begin_inset space ~
15868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15880 \begin_inset space ~
15887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15896 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15904 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15906 \begin_inset Index idx
15909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15910 FileFormats ! XHTML
15916 \begin_inset Index idx
15919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15928 \begin_layout Standard
15929 This file type has the extension
15930 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15938 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15942 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15943 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15944 When \SpecialChar LyX
15945 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15946 suitable for the purpose.
15947 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15949 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15950 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15953 between different formats, which are described in section
15955 Math Output in XHTML
15960 \begin_inset space ~
15968 \begin_layout Standard
15969 XHTML output remains
15970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15977 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
15978 features are supported yet.
15982 and the World Wide Web
15986 Additional Features
15988 manual, for more information.
15991 \begin_layout Standard
15992 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15994 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15995 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16002 \begin_layout Subsection
16004 \begin_inset Index idx
16007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16016 \begin_layout Standard
16017 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16018 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16027 or use the toolbar button
16034 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16035 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
16036 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16042 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16046 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16048 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16052 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16054 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
16059 Further output formats can be selected via
16061 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16062 View (Other Formats)
16064 or the toolbar button
16065 \begin_inset Graphics
16066 filename ../images/view-others.png
16068 groupId toolbarbuttons
16075 \begin_layout Standard
16076 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16077 viewer window using the menu
16079 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16084 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16085 Update (Other Formats)
16090 \begin_layout Standard
16091 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16094 To have a real output, export your document.
16097 \begin_layout Section
16098 A few Words about Typography
16099 \begin_inset Index idx
16102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16111 \begin_layout Subsection
16112 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16113 \begin_inset Index idx
16116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16123 \begin_inset Index idx
16126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16135 \begin_layout Standard
16136 In \SpecialChar LyX
16138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16149 character comes in four lengths: the
16161 , and the minus sign:
16162 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16168 \begin_layout Standard
16169 \begin_inset Tabular
16170 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16171 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16172 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16173 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16174 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16175 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16204 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16244 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16269 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16271 \begin_inset space ~
16274 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16281 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16306 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16308 \begin_inset space ~
16311 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16332 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16366 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16372 \begin_layout Standard
16373 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16385 character multiple times in a row.
16386 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16387 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16394 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16406 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16410 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16420 \begin_layout Standard
16421 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16422 math mode and has a length of its own.
16423 Here are some examples:
16426 \begin_layout Enumerate
16427 line- and page-breaks
16428 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16438 \begin_layout Enumerate
16440 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16450 \begin_layout Enumerate
16451 Oh — there's a dash.
16452 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16462 \begin_layout Enumerate
16463 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16467 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16477 \begin_layout Subsection
16479 \begin_inset Index idx
16482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16489 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16491 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16498 \begin_layout Standard
16499 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16500 but automatically in the output.
16501 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16507 \begin_inset Index idx
16510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16517 following the rules of the document language.
16520 \begin_layout Standard
16522 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16526 font and with unusual constructs, like
16527 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16535 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16536 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16537 This is done with the menu
16539 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16540 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16542 \begin_inset space ~
16548 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16550 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16554 \begin_layout Standard
16555 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16556 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16567 would then see the hyphen
16568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16575 as a hyphenation possibility.
16576 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16577 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16578 as described in section
16579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16582 Prevent Hyphenation
16583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16589 \begin_inset space ~
16597 \begin_layout Subsection
16599 \begin_inset Index idx
16602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16611 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16612 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16613 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16615 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16622 \begin_layout Standard
16623 When \SpecialChar LyX
16624 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16625 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16627 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16633 appropriate amount of space.
16634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16637 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16639 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16640 gets after another word.
16643 \begin_layout Standard
16644 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16645 not work in all cases.
16647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16658 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16659 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16662 \begin_layout Standard
16663 Here are some examples of
16667 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16670 \begin_layout Itemize
16675 \begin_layout Itemize
16680 \begin_layout Standard
16681 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16684 \begin_layout Itemize
16686 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16690 this is too much space!
16693 \begin_layout Itemize
16698 \begin_layout Standard
16699 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16702 \begin_layout Standard
16703 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16706 \begin_layout Enumerate
16710 \begin_inset space ~
16715 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16716 \begin_inset space ~
16720 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16722 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16727 \begin_inset Index idx
16730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16731 Spaces ! inter-word
16739 \begin_layout Enumerate
16743 \begin_inset space ~
16748 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16749 \begin_inset space ~
16753 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16755 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16760 \begin_inset Index idx
16763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16772 \begin_layout Enumerate
16776 \begin_inset space ~
16780 \begin_inset space ~
16784 \begin_inset space ~
16791 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16793 \begin_inset space ~
16798 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16799 This function is also bound to
16802 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16808 \begin_layout Standard
16809 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16812 \begin_layout Itemize
16814 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16818 \begin_inset space \space{}
16821 this is too much space!
16824 \begin_layout Itemize
16825 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16829 \begin_layout Standard
16830 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16831 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16833 will take care of this.
16836 \begin_layout Standard
16837 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16841 \begin_inset space ~
16847 feature described in the section
16849 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16854 Additional Features
16859 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16861 \begin_inset Index idx
16864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16865 Typography ! Quotes
16871 \begin_inset Index idx
16874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16905 \begin_layout Standard
16907 usually sets quotes correctly.
16908 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16909 and use a closing quote at the end.
16911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16919 The keyboard character,
16923 , generates this automatically.
16926 \begin_layout Standard
16927 You can specify what character the
16931 key produces using the submenu
16937 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16941 \begin_inset Index idx
16944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16945 Document ! Settings
16955 There are six choices:
16958 \begin_layout Labeling
16959 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16982 \begin_layout Labeling
16983 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16986 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16990 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16996 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17000 \begin_inset Quotes srd
17006 \begin_layout Labeling
17007 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17010 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17014 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17020 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17024 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17030 \begin_layout Labeling
17031 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17034 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17038 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17044 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17048 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17054 \begin_layout Labeling
17055 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17058 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17062 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17068 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17072 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17078 \begin_layout Labeling
17079 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17082 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17086 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17092 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17096 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17102 \begin_layout Standard
17103 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
17106 arg "quote-insert single"
17112 \begin_layout Subsection
17114 \begin_inset Index idx
17117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17118 Typography ! Ligatures
17124 \begin_inset Index idx
17127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17156 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17158 name "subsec:Ligatures"
17165 \begin_layout Standard
17166 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17167 print them as single characters.
17168 These groups are known as
17173 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
17174 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
17176 Here are the standard ligatures:
17179 \begin_layout Itemize
17183 \begin_layout Itemize
17187 \begin_layout Itemize
17191 \begin_layout Itemize
17195 \begin_layout Itemize
17199 \begin_layout Standard
17200 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17203 \begin_layout Standard
17204 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17205 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17210 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17213 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17229 To break a ligature, use
17231 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17232 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17234 \begin_inset space ~
17241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17252 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17269 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17277 \begin_layout Subsection
17280 \begin_inset Index idx
17283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17291 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17293 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17300 \begin_layout Standard
17301 You will certainly have noticed that the word “\SpecialChar LaTeX
17302 ” always appears with characters
17303 in different sizes and positions.
17305 is the name of the program used by \SpecialChar LyX
17306 and is therefore recognized as a proper
17307 name when you type it in \SpecialChar LyX
17309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17328 \begin_inset Note Note
17331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17332 The braces in \SpecialChar TeX
17333 Code are here to avoid that the Text appears as proper name
17334 in the output, see the last paragraph of this section.
17339 Note the order of the upper- and lowercase letters! \SpecialChar LyX
17340 recognizes the following
17344 \begin_layout Description
17346 The name of the game, write
17347 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17368 \begin_layout Description
17370 The program used by \SpecialChar LaTeX
17372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17393 \begin_layout Description
17395 The program used by \SpecialChar LyX
17397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17418 \begin_layout Description
17419 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
17420 The actual version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17443 \begin_layout Standard
17444 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17450 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17458 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
17459 -world to give programs geek version numbers.
17460 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
17461 converges to the number
17462 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17465 : The actual version is
17466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17474 , the previous one was
17475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17486 \begin_layout Standard
17487 If you don't want to use proper names, for example, in section headings,
17488 you can insert two empty braces in \SpecialChar TeX
17490 In \SpecialChar LyX
17491 this will look like
17492 \begin_inset Graphics
17493 filename clipart/LaTeX.png
17499 \begin_inset Newline newline
17502 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
17504 \begin_inset space ~
17508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17510 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
17517 \begin_layout Subsection
17519 \begin_inset Index idx
17522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17531 \begin_layout Standard
17532 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17533 space between two words.
17534 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17541 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17544 for units use the menu
17546 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17547 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17549 \begin_inset space ~
17557 arg "space-insert thin"
17563 \begin_layout Standard
17564 Here is an example to show the differences:
17567 \begin_layout Standard
17568 \begin_inset Tabular
17569 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17570 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17571 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17572 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17579 \begin_inset space ~
17583 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17595 space between number and unit
17602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17607 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17611 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17623 half space between number and unit
17636 \begin_layout Subsection
17638 \begin_inset Index idx
17641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17642 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17650 \begin_layout Standard
17651 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17653 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17654 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17655 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17656 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17657 These bits of text became known as
17668 \begin_layout Standard
17669 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
17670 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17671 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17672 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17673 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17674 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
17675 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
17676 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
17677 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17678 \begin_inset Newline newline
17686 \begin_inset Newline newline
17694 \begin_inset Newline newline
17697 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17698 preamble of your document to avoid them.
17699 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
17701 \begin_inset space ~
17705 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17707 key "latexcompanion"
17712 \begin_inset space ~
17716 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17722 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17723 's page break mechanism.
17726 \begin_layout Chapter
17727 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17728 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17730 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17737 \begin_layout Standard
17738 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17741 \begin_inset space ~
17747 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17750 \begin_layout Section
17752 \begin_inset Index idx
17755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17762 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17771 \begin_layout Standard
17773 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17776 \begin_layout Description
17779 \begin_inset space ~
17782 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17783 \begin_inset Newline newline
17787 \begin_inset Note Note
17790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17791 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17799 \begin_layout Description
17800 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17801 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17802 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17805 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17806 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17819 \begin_inset space ~
17825 \begin_inset Newline newline
17829 \begin_inset Note Comment
17832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17833 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
17842 \begin_layout Description
17844 \begin_inset space ~
17847 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17848 set in the document settings under
17850 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
17852 \begin_inset space ~
17858 \begin_inset Newline newline
17862 \begin_inset Newline newline
17866 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17875 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17876 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17881 of a comment that appears in the output.
17887 \begin_inset Newline newline
17891 \begin_inset Newline newline
17894 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17897 \begin_layout Standard
17898 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17906 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17910 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17913 \begin_layout Section
17915 \begin_inset Index idx
17918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17925 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17927 name "sec:Footnotes"
17934 \begin_layout Standard
17936 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
17939 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17942 or the toolbar button
17945 arg "footnote-insert"
17957 \begin_inset Graphics
17958 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
17967 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17968 's representation of your footnote.
17978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17997 label, the box will
18001 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
18002 Clicking on the box label again will close
18015 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
18016 and click on the footnote
18031 \begin_layout Standard
18032 Here is an example footnote:
18040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18041 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
18049 \begin_layout Standard
18050 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
18051 position where the footnote box is placed.
18052 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
18053 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
18054 according to the document class.
18056 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
18057 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
18063 ey are described in the
18066 \begin_inset space ~
18074 \begin_layout Section
18076 \begin_inset Index idx
18079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18086 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18088 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
18095 \begin_layout Standard
18096 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
18098 When you insert a margin note via the menu
18100 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18102 \begin_inset space ~
18107 or the toolbar button
18110 arg "marginalnote-insert"
18129 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18133 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18136 appearing within your text.
18137 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18138 's representation of your margin
18147 \begin_layout Standard
18148 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
18152 \begin_inset Marginal
18155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18157 This is a marginal note.
18165 \begin_layout Standard
18166 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
18167 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
18168 pages, right on odd pages.
18171 \begin_layout Standard
18172 For further information about marginal notes see the section
18175 \begin_inset space ~
18183 \begin_inset space ~
18191 \begin_layout Section
18192 Graphics and Images
18193 \begin_inset Index idx
18196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18203 \begin_inset Index idx
18206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18213 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18215 name "sec:Graphics"
18222 \begin_layout Standard
18223 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
18224 you want and click on the toolbar icon
18227 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
18232 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18236 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18239 \begin_layout Standard
18240 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18245 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18246 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18248 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18249 \begin_inset space ~
18253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18255 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18262 \begin_layout Standard
18267 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18268 of the image in the output.
18269 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18273 \begin_inset space ~
18277 \begin_inset space ~
18286 \begin_inset space ~
18290 \begin_inset space ~
18294 \begin_inset space ~
18299 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18300 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18308 \begin_layout Standard
18315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18323 \begin_inset space ~
18327 \begin_inset space ~
18334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18343 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
18344 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
18346 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
18351 \begin_inset space ~
18356 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18357 with the image size is printed.
18360 \begin_layout Standard
18361 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18362 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18364 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18367 \begin_layout Standard
18369 \begin_inset Graphics
18370 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18378 \begin_layout Standard
18379 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18380 the image into a float, see section
18381 \begin_inset space ~
18385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18387 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
18394 \begin_layout Subsection
18396 \begin_inset Index idx
18399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18406 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18408 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
18415 \begin_layout Standard
18416 You can insert images in any known file format.
18417 But as we explained in section
18418 \begin_inset space ~
18422 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18424 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18428 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18430 therefore uses the program
18434 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18435 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18436 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18437 \begin_inset space ~
18441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18443 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18450 \begin_layout Standard
18451 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18454 \begin_layout Description
18456 \begin_inset space ~
18459 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18460 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18461 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18465 Graphics Interchange Format
18466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18469 (GIF, file extension
18470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18482 \begin_inset Index idx
18485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18517 Portable Network Graphics
18518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18521 (PNG, file extension
18522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18534 \begin_inset Index idx
18537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18569 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18573 (JPG, file extension
18574 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18598 \begin_inset Index idx
18601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18632 \begin_layout Description
18634 \begin_inset space ~
18637 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18639 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18640 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18641 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18642 \begin_inset Newline newline
18645 Scalable image formats can be
18646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18649 Scalable Vector Graphics
18650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18653 (SVG, file extension
18654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18666 \begin_inset Index idx
18669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18701 Encapsulated PostScript
18702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18705 (EPS, file extension
18706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18718 \begin_inset Index idx
18721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18753 Portable Document Format
18754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18757 (PDF, file extension
18758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18770 \begin_inset Index idx
18773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18781 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18785 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18788 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18789 result will not be scalable.
18790 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18796 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18804 \begin_layout Standard
18805 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18812 \begin_layout Subsection
18813 Grouping of Image Settings
18814 \begin_inset Index idx
18817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18818 Images ! Settings grouping
18826 \begin_layout Standard
18827 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18829 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18830 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18832 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18833 need to manually change each of them.
18837 \begin_layout Standard
18838 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18841 \begin_inset space ~
18845 \begin_inset space ~
18860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18868 \begin_inset space ~
18872 \begin_inset space ~
18879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18889 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18890 and checking the name of the desired group.
18893 \begin_layout Section
18895 \begin_inset Index idx
18898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18905 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18914 \begin_layout Standard
18915 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18918 arg "tabular-insert"
18923 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18927 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18928 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18929 from the rest of the table.
18930 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18931 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18933 Here is an example table:
18936 \begin_layout Standard
18938 \begin_inset Tabular
18939 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18940 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18941 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18942 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18943 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18944 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19144 \begin_layout Subsection
19148 \begin_layout Standard
19149 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
19152 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
19156 This brings up the table dialog.
19157 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
19158 cursor is placed currently.
19159 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
19160 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
19161 done on all of your selection.
19164 \begin_layout Standard
19165 In addition to the table dialog, the
19168 \begin_inset space ~
19173 helps you in setting table properties.
19174 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
19177 \begin_layout Standard
19181 \begin_inset space ~
19186 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
19187 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
19188 current cell respectively.
19189 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
19191 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
19192 of text, see section
19193 \begin_inset space ~
19197 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19199 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
19206 \begin_layout Standard
19207 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
19208 using the check box
19217 This will merge the cells to
19221 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
19222 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
19223 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
19224 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
19225 in the last row without the upper border:
19228 \begin_layout Standard
19230 \begin_inset Tabular
19231 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
19232 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
19233 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19234 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
19235 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19236 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19247 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19256 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19332 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19367 \begin_layout Standard
19368 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19369 -arguments for the table.
19370 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19371 explained in the chapter
19378 \begin_inset space ~
19384 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
19385 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
19386 but are visible in the output.
19389 \begin_layout Standard
19390 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19398 Most DVI-viewers are
19402 able to display rotations.
19410 \begin_layout Standard
19415 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19420 adds lines for all cell borders.
19423 \begin_layout Subsection
19425 \begin_inset Index idx
19428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19429 Tables ! Longtables
19435 \begin_inset Index idx
19438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19447 \begin_layout Standard
19448 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19451 \begin_inset space ~
19455 \begin_inset space ~
19464 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19465 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19468 \begin_layout Description
19473 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19474 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19475 except for the first page, if
19478 \begin_inset space ~
19486 \begin_layout Description
19490 \begin_inset space ~
19495 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19496 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19499 \begin_layout Description
19504 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19505 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19506 except for the last page, if
19509 \begin_inset space ~
19517 \begin_layout Description
19521 \begin_inset space ~
19526 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19527 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19530 \begin_layout Description
19531 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19532 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19534 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19538 More about longtable captions can be found in the
19541 \begin_inset space ~
19549 \begin_layout Standard
19550 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19551 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19552 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19558 In this context, first means first in this order:
19561 \begin_inset space ~
19573 \begin_inset space ~
19578 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19581 \begin_layout Standard
19583 \begin_inset Tabular
19584 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19585 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19586 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19587 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19588 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19589 <row endfirsthead="true">
19590 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19596 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19601 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19610 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19620 <row endfirsthead="true">
19621 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19632 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19641 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19653 <row endhead="true">
19654 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19665 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19674 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19684 <row endhead="true">
19685 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19696 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19705 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19717 <row endfoot="true">
19718 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19729 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19738 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19769 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20710 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20719 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20728 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20739 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20770 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20801 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20832 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20863 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20894 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20925 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20956 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20987 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21018 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21049 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21080 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21111 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21142 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21173 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21204 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21235 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21266 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21297 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21328 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21359 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21390 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21421 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21452 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21483 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21514 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21545 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21576 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21607 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21638 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21669 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21699 <row endlastfoot="true">
21700 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21711 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21720 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21737 \begin_layout Subsection
21739 \begin_inset Index idx
21742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21749 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21751 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
21758 \begin_layout Standard
21759 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21760 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21761 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21762 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21766 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21769 \begin_layout Standard
21770 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21771 for the column in the table dialog.
21772 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21773 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21777 \begin_layout Standard
21779 \begin_inset Tabular
21780 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21781 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21782 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21783 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21784 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21804 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21873 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21929 This is longer now.
21934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21985 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21986 This is longer now.
21991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22017 \begin_layout Standard
22018 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
22019 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
22023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22024 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
22025 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
22031 Selection with the mouse or with
22035 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
22036 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
22037 the selection from outside the table.
22040 \begin_layout Section
22042 \begin_inset Index idx
22045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22052 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22061 \begin_layout Subsection
22065 \begin_layout Standard
22066 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
22067 have a fixed location.
22069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22076 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
22084 \begin_inset space ~
22089 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
22090 too many notes on the current page.
22093 \begin_layout Standard
22094 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
22095 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
22096 and pages without text.
22097 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
22098 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
22099 Floats are therefore numbered.
22100 Referencing is described in section
22101 \begin_inset space ~
22105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22107 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22114 \begin_layout Standard
22115 To insert a float, use the menu
22117 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22121 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
22122 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
22124 After the label you can insert the caption text.
22125 \begin_inset Index idx
22128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22134 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
22135 paragraph within the float.
22136 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
22137 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
22138 left-clicking on the box label.
22139 A closed float box looks like this:
22140 \begin_inset Graphics
22141 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
22146 – a gray button with a red label.
22149 \begin_layout Standard
22150 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
22152 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
22155 \begin_layout Subsection
22157 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22159 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
22164 \begin_inset Index idx
22167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22168 Floats ! Figure floats
22176 \begin_layout Standard
22178 \begin_inset space ~
22182 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22184 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22188 was created using the menu
22190 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22191 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22197 arg "float-insert figure"
22201 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
22204 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22210 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
22214 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
22215 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
22217 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
22219 \begin_inset space ~
22227 arg "layout-paragraph"
22233 \begin_layout Standard
22234 \begin_inset Float figure
22239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22241 \begin_inset Graphics
22242 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22252 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22255 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22257 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22261 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22274 \begin_layout Standard
22275 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22276 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22278 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22287 ) and refer to it using the menu
22289 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22295 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22299 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22300 vague references like
22301 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22308 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
22309 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
22311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22319 For more about cross-references, see section
22320 \begin_inset space ~
22324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22326 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22333 \begin_layout Standard
22334 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22335 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22336 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22337 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22338 as described in section
22339 \begin_inset space ~
22343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22345 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
22351 \begin_inset space ~
22355 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22357 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22361 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22362 You can also set the images one below the other.
22364 \begin_inset space ~
22368 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22370 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22377 reference "fig:Platypus"
22381 are the subfigures.
22384 \begin_layout Standard
22385 \begin_inset Float figure
22390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22391 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22395 \begin_inset Float figure
22400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22401 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22404 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22406 name "fig:Undefinable"
22418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22419 \begin_inset Graphics
22420 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22431 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22435 \begin_inset Float figure
22440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22441 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22444 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22446 name "fig:Platypus"
22458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22459 \begin_inset Graphics
22460 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22472 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22479 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22482 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22484 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22488 Two distorted images.
22501 \begin_layout Subsection
22503 \begin_inset Index idx
22506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22507 Floats ! Table floats
22515 \begin_layout Standard
22516 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22518 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22519 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22522 or the toolbar button
22525 arg "float-insert table"
22529 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22530 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22531 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22533 \begin_inset space ~
22537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22539 reference "tab:Table-float"
22546 \begin_layout Standard
22547 \begin_inset Float table
22552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22553 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22556 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22558 name "tab:Table-float"
22570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22572 \begin_inset Tabular
22573 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22574 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22575 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22576 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22577 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22704 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22725 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22728 \end{array}\right]$
22736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22749 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22770 \begin_layout Subsection
22772 \begin_inset Index idx
22775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22784 \begin_layout Standard
22786 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22787 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22788 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22790 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22798 \begin_inset space ~
22806 \begin_layout Section
22808 \begin_inset Index idx
22811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22820 \begin_layout Standard
22822 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
22824 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22825 \begin_inset space \space{}
22832 \begin_layout Standard
22833 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
22834 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22836 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22840 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22841 and its alignment within the page.
22844 \begin_layout Standard
22846 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22856 height_special "totalheight"
22861 backgroundcolor "none"
22864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22867 This is a minipage.
22868 The text is set in an italic style.
22871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22874 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22875 another formatting.
22883 \begin_layout Standard
22884 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22887 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22891 as described in section
22892 \begin_inset space ~
22896 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22898 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
22903 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22909 \begin_layout Standard
22910 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22920 height_special "totalheight"
22925 backgroundcolor "none"
22928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22929 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22930 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22936 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22940 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22950 height_special "totalheight"
22955 backgroundcolor "none"
22958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22959 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22960 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22968 \begin_layout Standard
22969 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22975 \begin_layout Standard
22976 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22978 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22985 \begin_inset space ~
22993 \begin_layout Chapter
22994 Mathematical Formulas
22995 \begin_inset Index idx
22998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23005 \begin_inset Index idx
23008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23037 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23039 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
23046 \begin_layout Standard
23047 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
23052 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
23055 \begin_layout Section
23057 \begin_inset Index idx
23060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23069 \begin_layout Standard
23070 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
23083 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
23085 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
23086 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
23087 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
23089 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23095 \begin_layout Standard
23096 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
23100 \begin_inset space ~
23105 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
23108 \begin_layout Standard
23109 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
23110 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
23113 \begin_layout Standard
23114 This is a line with an inline formula
23115 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
23121 \begin_layout Standard
23122 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
23123 paragraph, like this one:
23124 \begin_inset Formula
23131 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
23134 \begin_layout Standard
23136 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
23138 For example, typing
23139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23152 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
23153 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
23157 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
23160 \begin_inset space ~
23168 \begin_layout Subsection
23169 Navigating in Formulas
23170 \begin_inset Index idx
23173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23182 \begin_layout Standard
23183 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
23184 achieved with the arrow keys.
23186 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
23187 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
23192 will leave a formula construct (a square root
23193 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
23197 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
23201 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23204 \end{array}\right]$
23212 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
23217 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
23218 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
23221 \begin_layout Standard
23226 , printed in this document as
23227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23231 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23238 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
23239 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
23240 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
23245 For example, if you want
23246 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
23254 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23264 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23268 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23273 , since in the latter case only the
23276 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23281 will be under the square root sign:
23282 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23288 \begin_layout Standard
23289 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23291 \begin_inset Formula
23293 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23302 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23303 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23306 \begin_layout Subsection
23310 \begin_layout Standard
23311 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23312 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23316 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23317 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23318 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23319 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23320 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
23324 \begin_layout Subsection
23325 Exponents and Subscripts
23326 \begin_inset Index idx
23329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23336 \begin_inset Index idx
23339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23348 \begin_layout Standard
23349 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23352 arg "math-superscript"
23358 arg "math-subscript"
23361 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23363 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23366 , type in a formula
23369 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23379 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23385 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23389 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23395 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23401 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23410 , you have to use an extra
23414 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23415 For example, if you want
23416 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23422 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23428 Subscripts are similar: To get
23429 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23435 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23443 \begin_layout Subsection
23445 \begin_inset Index idx
23448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23457 \begin_layout Standard
23458 Create a fraction either with the command
23464 or by using the icon
23467 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23473 \begin_inset space ~
23479 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23480 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23481 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23486 To move back up, press
23491 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23492 \begin_inset Formula
23494 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23497 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23505 \begin_layout Subsection
23507 \begin_inset Index idx
23510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23519 \begin_layout Standard
23520 Roots can be created using the
23523 \begin_inset space ~
23531 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23537 arg "math-insert \\root"
23559 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23565 always produces a square root.
23568 \begin_layout Subsection
23569 Operators with Limits
23570 \begin_inset Index idx
23573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23580 \begin_inset Index idx
23583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23590 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23592 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23599 \begin_layout Standard
23601 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23605 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23608 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23609 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
23610 by entering them as you would enter a super-
23611 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23612 The sum operator will automatically place its
23613 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23617 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23620 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23622 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23626 \begin_inset Formula
23628 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23633 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23637 \begin_layout Standard
23638 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23640 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23641 behind the operator and using the menu
23643 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23644 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23646 \begin_inset space ~
23650 \begin_inset space ~
23664 \begin_layout Standard
23665 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23674 \begin_inset Index idx
23677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23684 \begin_inset Formula
23686 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23691 which will place the
23692 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23704 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23705 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23711 \begin_layout Standard
23712 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23719 Have a look at section
23720 \begin_inset space ~
23724 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23726 reference "subsec:Functions"
23730 for an explanation of function macros.
23733 \begin_layout Subsection
23735 \begin_inset Index idx
23738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23747 \begin_layout Standard
23748 Most math symbols can be found in the
23751 \begin_inset space ~
23756 under one of several categories; including
23773 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23777 \begin_layout Standard
23778 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
23779 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
23780 don't have to use the
23783 \begin_inset space ~
23788 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23790 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23793 \begin_layout Subsection
23795 \begin_inset Index idx
23798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23807 \begin_layout Standard
23808 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23814 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23820 \begin_inset space ~
23828 arg "math-insert \\space"
23832 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23833 For example, the sequence
23838 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
23841 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
23843 \begin_inset Graphics
23844 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23849 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23850 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23851 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23852 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
23853 , because they are negative
23855 Here are two examples:
23858 \begin_layout Standard
23868 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23874 \begin_layout Standard
23884 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
23890 \begin_layout Subsection
23892 \begin_inset Index idx
23895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23902 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23904 name "subsec:Functions"
23911 \begin_layout Standard
23915 \begin_inset space ~
23920 contains under the button
23923 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23926 a number of function macros, such as
23927 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23931 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23939 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23946 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23947 avoid confusions, because
23948 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23952 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23958 \begin_layout Standard
23959 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23961 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23965 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23971 \begin_layout Standard
23972 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23973 are placed, as described in section
23974 \begin_inset space ~
23978 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23980 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23987 \begin_layout Subsection
23989 \begin_inset Index idx
23992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24001 \begin_layout Standard
24002 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
24004 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
24005 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
24006 commands, for example, to enter
24007 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24010 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
24011 Our example is entered by typing
24016 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24023 \begin_inset space ~
24027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24029 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
24033 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
24036 \begin_layout Standard
24037 \begin_inset Float table
24042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24043 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24046 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24048 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
24052 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
24060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24062 \begin_inset Tabular
24063 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
24064 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24065 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24066 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24067 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24151 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24205 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
24215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24259 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24313 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24367 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24421 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24475 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24529 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24583 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24628 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24649 \begin_layout Standard
24650 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24653 \begin_inset space ~
24661 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24664 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24668 \begin_layout Section
24669 Brackets and Delimiters
24670 \begin_inset Index idx
24673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24680 \begin_inset Index idx
24683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24690 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24692 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24699 \begin_layout Standard
24700 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
24702 For some purposes, using just the keys
24707 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24708 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24709 toolbar delimiter icon
24712 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24716 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24717 \begin_inset Formula
24719 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24727 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24728 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24732 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24735 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24741 \begin_inset Formula
24743 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24751 \begin_layout Standard
24752 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24753 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24757 \begin_layout Standard
24758 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24759 left side and right side.
24760 If you use the option
24763 \begin_inset space ~
24768 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24769 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
24771 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24776 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
24777 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24780 \begin_layout Standard
24781 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24782 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24783 is to go inside the brackets.
24784 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24789 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24790 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24791 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24795 arg "math-delim ( )"
24801 \begin_layout Section
24802 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24803 \begin_inset Index idx
24806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24813 \begin_inset Index idx
24816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24823 \begin_inset Index idx
24826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24827 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24835 \begin_layout Standard
24836 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24840 \begin_inset space ~
24848 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24852 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24853 Here is an example:
24854 \begin_inset Formula
24856 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24865 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24866 \begin_inset space ~
24870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24872 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24877 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24878 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24879 This alignment is set in the box
24884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24916 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24930 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24933 for every column as default.
24934 For example, the sequence
24935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24946 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24947 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24948 corresponds to the relevant column.
24949 The result will look like this:
24950 \begin_inset Formula
24953 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
24954 column & has & has\,right\\
24955 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
24964 \begin_layout Standard
24965 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24968 arg "newline-insert newline"
24971 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24972 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24974 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24977 or the math toolbar.
24980 \begin_layout Standard
24981 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24982 It can be created with the menu
24984 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24985 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24987 \begin_inset space ~
24999 Here is an example:
25000 \begin_inset Formula
25014 \begin_layout Standard
25015 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25018 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
25021 arg "newline-insert newline"
25025 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
25030 arg "newline-insert newline"
25033 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
25034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25041 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
25042 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
25043 A new row is created by every further entry of
25046 arg "newline-insert newline"
25050 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
25051 Here is an example:
25052 \begin_inset Formula
25054 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
25055 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
25060 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
25061 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
25062 \begin_inset Formula
25064 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
25072 \begin_layout Standard
25073 The multi-line formula type described here is called
25080 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
25081 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
25082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25084 reference "eq:asquared"
25089 The other types are described in section
25090 \begin_inset space ~
25094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25096 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25103 \begin_layout Section
25104 Formula Numbering and Referencing
25105 \begin_inset Index idx
25108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25109 Math ! Formula numbering
25115 \begin_inset Index idx
25118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25119 Math ! Referencing formulas
25125 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25127 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
25134 \begin_layout Standard
25135 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
25137 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25138 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25140 \begin_inset space ~
25144 \begin_inset space ~
25152 arg "math-number-toggle"
25156 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25157 within parentheses.
25158 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
25159 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
25160 the document class.
25161 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
25162 separated by a dot:
25163 \begin_inset Formula
25173 arg "math-number-toggle"
25176 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
25177 You can only number displayed formulas.
25180 \begin_layout Standard
25181 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
25183 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25184 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25186 \begin_inset space ~
25190 \begin_inset space ~
25198 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
25201 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
25202 \begin_inset Formula
25205 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
25211 To number all lines use the shortcut
25214 arg "math-number-toggle"
25220 \begin_layout Standard
25221 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25224 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
25225 A label is inserted with the menu
25227 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25236 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
25237 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
25238 It is recommended that you use the suggested
25239 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25250 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
25251 label type when you have many labels in your document.
25252 We inserted in the following example the label
25253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25260 in the second line:
25261 \begin_inset Formula
25263 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
25264 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25269 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25270 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25271 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25273 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25275 \begin_inset space ~
25283 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25287 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25288 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25289 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25290 as the formula number:
25293 \begin_layout Standard
25294 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25297 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25304 \begin_layout Standard
25305 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
25306 's cross-reference box are described in section
25307 \begin_inset space ~
25311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25313 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25318 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25326 \begin_layout Section
25327 User defined math macros
25328 \begin_inset Index idx
25331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25340 \begin_layout Standard
25342 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25343 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25344 Math macros are explained in section
25347 \begin_inset space ~
25359 \begin_layout Section
25363 \begin_layout Subsection
25365 \begin_inset Index idx
25368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25377 \begin_layout Standard
25378 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25379 To set a font in a formula, use the
25382 \begin_inset space ~
25390 arg "math-insert \\font"
25393 , or enter its command, listed in table
25394 \begin_inset space ~
25398 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25400 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25407 \begin_layout Standard
25408 \begin_inset Float table
25413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25414 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25417 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25419 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25423 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25433 \begin_inset Tabular
25434 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25435 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25436 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25437 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25469 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25496 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25523 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25556 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25583 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25610 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25644 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25671 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25705 \begin_layout Standard
25706 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25714 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25730 \begin_layout Standard
25731 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25732 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25737 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25738 space when you need a space in the box.
25739 Here is an example where
25740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25751 denotes the set of numbers:
25752 \begin_inset Formula
25754 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
25762 \begin_layout Standard
25763 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25764 You can, for example, put a character in
25773 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25777 \begin_inset Newline newline
25780 So it is better not to use this feature.
25783 \begin_layout Standard
25784 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25785 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25789 \begin_inset Newline newline
25792 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25798 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25799 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25805 \begin_layout Standard
25812 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25815 \begin_layout Standard
25816 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25818 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25819 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25821 \begin_inset space ~
25829 \begin_layout Subsection
25831 \begin_inset Index idx
25834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25843 \begin_layout Standard
25844 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25846 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25850 \begin_inset space ~
25854 \begin_inset space ~
25862 \begin_inset space ~
25870 arg "math-insert \\font"
25874 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25875 in black instead of blue.
25876 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25877 Here is an example:
25878 \begin_inset Formula
25881 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25882 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25891 \begin_layout Subsection
25893 \begin_inset Index idx
25896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25905 \begin_layout Standard
25906 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25907 automatically chosen in most situations.
25925 For most characters,
25933 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25934 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25939 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25940 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
25941 thinks are appropriate.
25942 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25945 arg "math-insert \\style"
25949 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25950 For example, you can set
25951 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25954 , which is normally in
25963 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25967 The four styles are used in the following example:
25970 \begin_layout Standard
25971 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25975 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25979 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25983 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25989 \begin_layout Standard
25990 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25991 is set in a particular size with the menu
25993 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25995 \begin_inset space ~
26000 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
26001 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
26002 will be adjusted to correspond.
26003 As an example here is a formula in the font size
26004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26014 \begin_layout Standard
26018 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
26024 \begin_layout Section
26025 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26027 \begin_inset Index idx
26030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26037 \begin_inset Index idx
26040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26049 \begin_layout Standard
26051 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
26052 that are in common use.
26055 \begin_layout Subsection
26056 Enabling AMS-Support
26059 \begin_layout Standard
26060 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
26061 the document by selecting the checkbox
26064 \begin_inset space ~
26068 \begin_inset space ~
26072 \begin_inset space ~
26079 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26083 \begin_inset Index idx
26086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26087 Document ! Settings
26095 \begin_inset space ~
26101 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26102 -errors in formulas,
26103 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
26106 \begin_layout Subsection
26108 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26110 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26115 \begin_inset Index idx
26118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26119 Math ! Multi-line Equations
26127 \begin_layout Standard
26128 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26129 provides a selection of different formula types.
26131 allows you to choose between
26152 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
26153 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26159 , for an explanation of these formula types.
26162 \begin_layout Chapter
26166 \begin_layout Section
26168 \begin_inset Index idx
26171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26178 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26180 name "sec:Cross-References"
26187 \begin_layout Standard
26188 One of \SpecialChar LyX
26189 's strengths is cross-references.
26190 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
26192 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
26193 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
26194 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
26197 \begin_layout Enumerate
26201 \begin_layout Enumerate
26202 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26204 name "enu:Second-item"
26211 \begin_layout Enumerate
26215 \begin_layout Standard
26216 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
26218 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26221 or by pressing the toolbar button
26228 A gray label box like this:
26229 \begin_inset Graphics
26230 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
26235 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
26237 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
26239 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26272 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
26273 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
26275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26289 \begin_layout Standard
26290 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26292 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26295 or the toolbar button
26298 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26302 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26303 \begin_inset Graphics
26304 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
26309 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26311 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26324 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26328 \begin_layout Standard
26329 As an alternative to
26331 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26334 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26339 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26340 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26342 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26354 \begin_layout Standard
26355 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26356 \begin_inset space ~
26360 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26362 reference "enu:Second-item"
26369 \begin_layout Standard
26370 It is recommended to use a protected space
26374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26375 described in section
26376 \begin_inset space ~
26380 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26382 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
26391 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26392 line breaks between them.
26395 \begin_layout Standard
26396 There are six formats of cross-references:
26399 \begin_layout Description
26400 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26403 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26410 \begin_layout Description
26411 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26412 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26422 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26424 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26431 \begin_layout Description
26432 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26433 \begin_inset space ~
26437 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26438 LatexCommand pageref
26439 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26446 \begin_layout Description
26448 \begin_inset space ~
26452 \begin_inset space ~
26455 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26456 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26457 LatexCommand vpageref
26458 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26463 \begin_inset Newline newline
26466 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26467 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26468 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26469 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26470 it prints “on the next page”.
26471 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26474 \begin_layout Description
26476 \begin_inset space ~
26480 \begin_inset space ~
26484 \begin_inset space ~
26487 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26490 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26495 \begin_inset Newline newline
26498 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26504 ; otherwise it behaves like
26508 \begin_inset space ~
26512 \begin_inset space ~
26521 \begin_layout Description
26523 \begin_inset space ~
26526 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26527 \begin_inset Newline newline
26531 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26539 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26549 \begin_inset Index idx
26552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26554 -packages ! prettyref
26560 \begin_inset Index idx
26563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26565 -packages ! refstyle
26576 \begin_inset Newline newline
26579 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
26580 -package should be used for this feature by setting
26583 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26587 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26588 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26596 is the default and preferred because
26600 supports only English documents.
26601 The format is specified by using the command
26613 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26614 preamble of the document.
26615 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26628 ) can be done with this command
26629 \begin_inset Newline newline
26636 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26641 \begin_inset Newline newline
26644 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26646 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26648 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26655 \begin_layout Description
26657 \begin_inset space ~
26660 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26661 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26662 LatexCommand nameref
26663 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26670 \begin_layout Standard
26671 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26672 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
26674 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26678 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26682 \begin_layout Standard
26683 You can only use the style
26687 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26691 is always possible.
26694 \begin_layout Standard
26695 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26696 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26698 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26699 \begin_inset space ~
26703 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26705 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26712 \begin_layout Standard
26713 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26717 \begin_inset space ~
26721 \begin_inset space ~
26726 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26727 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26730 \begin_inset space ~
26735 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26736 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26739 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26745 \begin_layout Standard
26746 You can change labels at any time.
26747 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26748 do not need to think about this.
26751 \begin_layout Standard
26752 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
26754 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
26758 \begin_layout Standard
26759 References are described in detail in the section
26760 \begin_inset space ~
26764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26774 \begin_inset space ~
26782 \begin_layout Section
26783 Table of Contents and other Listings
26784 \begin_inset Index idx
26787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26794 \begin_inset Index idx
26797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26804 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26813 \begin_layout Subsection
26815 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26817 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
26824 \begin_layout Standard
26825 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26827 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26828 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
26830 \begin_inset space ~
26834 \begin_inset space ~
26840 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
26842 If you click on it, the
26846 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26847 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26848 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26850 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
26852 \begin_inset space ~
26857 that is described in section
26858 \begin_inset space ~
26862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26864 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
26871 \begin_layout Standard
26872 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26873 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26875 \begin_inset space ~
26879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26881 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26885 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26887 \begin_inset space ~
26891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26893 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
26897 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26899 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26902 \begin_layout Subsection
26903 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26904 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26906 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26913 \begin_layout Standard
26914 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26916 You can insert them via the
26918 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26922 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26925 \begin_layout Section
26926 URLs and Hyperlinks
26927 \begin_inset Index idx
26930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26937 \begin_inset Index idx
26940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26949 \begin_layout Subsection
26951 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26960 \begin_layout Standard
26961 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26963 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26969 \begin_layout Standard
26970 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
26972 \begin_inset Flex URL
26975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26985 \begin_layout Standard
26986 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26992 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26996 \begin_layout Standard
26997 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27005 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27014 \begin_layout Subsection
27016 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27018 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
27025 \begin_layout Standard
27026 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
27028 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27031 or with the toolbar button
27038 The appearing dialog has two fields:
27047 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
27048 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
27049 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27051 name "LyX's homepage"
27052 target "http://www.lyx.org"
27056 , an Email address like this:
27057 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27059 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
27060 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
27065 , or a link to a file.
27068 \begin_layout Standard
27069 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
27071 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27082 to the link target.
27085 \begin_layout Standard
27086 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
27087 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
27088 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
27089 the text style dialog.
27090 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
27094 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27096 name "LyX's homepage"
27097 target "http://www.lyx.org"
27104 \begin_layout Standard
27105 The link text color can be changed, when the option
27109 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
27111 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27112 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27116 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
27118 \begin_inset Newline newline
27126 \begin_inset Newline newline
27133 in the PDF Properties dialog.
27136 \begin_layout Section
27138 \begin_inset Index idx
27141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27148 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27150 name "sec:Appendices"
27157 \begin_layout Standard
27158 Appendices are created with the menu
27160 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27162 \begin_inset space ~
27166 \begin_inset space ~
27172 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
27173 as the appendix part of the book.
27174 This part is marked with a red borderline.
27177 \begin_layout Standard
27178 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
27179 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
27180 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
27181 and the subsection number.
27182 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
27186 \begin_layout Standard
27188 \begin_inset space ~
27192 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27194 reference "chap:Credits"
27199 \begin_inset space ~
27203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27205 reference "subsec:Export"
27212 \begin_layout Section
27214 \begin_inset Index idx
27217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27224 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27226 name "sec:Bibliography"
27233 \begin_layout Standard
27234 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
27236 You can include a bibliography database,
27240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27241 Known under the name
27242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27245 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27255 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
27256 manually, using the paragraph environment
27260 , which was described in section
27261 \begin_inset space ~
27265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27267 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
27272 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
27273 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
27277 use a bibliography database.
27280 \begin_layout Subsection
27281 The Bibliography Environment
27284 \begin_layout Standard
27289 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
27291 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
27300 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
27302 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
27305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27312 , a short form of its title, as the key.
27315 \begin_layout Standard
27316 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27318 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27321 or the toolbar button
27324 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27328 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27329 containing the available citations.
27330 Select one or more keys from the list and
27340 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27341 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27345 \begin_layout Standard
27346 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27347 entry with surrounding brackets.
27352 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27353 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27365 \begin_layout Standard
27369 Companion Second Edition
27372 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27374 key "latexcompanion"
27381 \begin_layout Standard
27382 The \SpecialChar LyX
27383 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
27384 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27393 \begin_layout Standard
27394 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27397 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27399 \begin_inset space ~
27407 arg "layout-paragraph"
27411 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27414 \begin_layout Subsection
27415 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27417 \begin_inset Index idx
27420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27421 Bibliography ! Databases
27427 \begin_inset Index idx
27430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27431 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27438 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27440 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
27447 \begin_layout Standard
27448 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27454 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27456 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27457 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27462 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27464 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27465 your working field in a database.
27466 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27467 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27468 list for that document.
27469 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27473 \begin_layout Standard
27474 The database is a text file with the file extension
27475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27486 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27487 The format is explained in
27488 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27494 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27496 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27498 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27503 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27504 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27505 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
27507 \begin_inset Flex URL
27510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27512 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27520 \begin_layout Standard
27521 To use a database, use the menu
27523 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27528 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27541 \begin_inset space ~
27547 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27548 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27555 Add bibliography to TOC
27557 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27562 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27563 in the document or just the cited references.
27566 \begin_layout Standard
27567 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27579 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27580 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
27581 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27582 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27584 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27590 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27591 \begin_inset Newline newline
27595 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27597 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27609 \begin_layout Standard
27610 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27613 \begin_layout Standard
27614 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
27615 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27617 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
27624 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27625 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27630 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
27631 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
27632 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
27637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27647 The following variants are possible:
27650 \begin_layout Description
27651 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27652 with other bibliography packages (e.
27653 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27657 \begin_inset space \space{}
27664 ), only with the package
27668 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27672 \begin_layout Description
27673 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27674 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27675 with all bibliography packages, except
27680 \begin_layout Description
27681 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27686 , works with all bibliography packages
27689 \begin_layout Standard
27690 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27691 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27693 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27696 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27700 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27709 \begin_layout Standard
27710 When you select the option
27712 Sectioned bibliography
27716 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27717 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27720 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27721 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27723 Customizing Bibliographies
27727 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27732 Additional Features
27737 \begin_layout Standard
27738 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27739 the two methods of creating them.
27740 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27741 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27742 We used the style file
27746 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27749 \begin_layout Subsection
27750 Bibliography layout
27751 \begin_inset Index idx
27754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27755 Bibliography ! Layout
27763 \begin_layout Standard
27764 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27765 For this feature you need to enable the option
27771 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27775 \begin_inset Index idx
27778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27779 Document ! Settings
27789 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27790 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27791 style files as explained in
27792 the previous section.
27795 \begin_layout Standard
27796 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27797 the citation reference window.
27798 Here is an example where the text
27799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27803 \begin_inset space ~
27807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27810 appears after the reference:
27813 \begin_layout Standard
27815 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27818 key "latexcompanion"
27825 \begin_layout Section
27827 \begin_inset Index idx
27830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27837 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27846 \begin_layout Standard
27847 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27849 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27851 \begin_inset space ~
27856 or the toolbar button
27863 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27864 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27865 by \SpecialChar LyX
27866 as the index entry.
27869 \begin_layout Standard
27870 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27872 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27873 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27875 \begin_inset space ~
27881 A light blue box labeled
27882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27893 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27894 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
27898 \begin_layout Standard
27899 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27900 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
27901 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
27902 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27904 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27906 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27913 \begin_layout Subsection
27914 Grouping Index Entries
27915 \begin_inset Index idx
27918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27927 \begin_layout Standard
27928 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27930 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27931 lists under the entry
27932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27936 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27940 First we create the entry
27941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27945 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27949 \begin_inset space ~
27953 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27955 reference "subsec:Lists"
27960 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27961 \begin_inset space ~
27965 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27967 reference "sec:Itemize"
27971 , we insert the command
27974 \begin_layout Standard
27980 \begin_layout Standard
27984 \begin_layout Standard
27990 \begin_layout Standard
27991 for the enumerated list in section
27992 \begin_inset space ~
27996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27998 reference "sec:Enumerate"
28005 \begin_layout Standard
28006 The exclamation mark
28007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28014 marks the grouping levels.
28015 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
28016 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
28017 If we don't have an index entry for
28018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28025 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
28028 \begin_layout Subsection
28030 \begin_inset Index idx
28033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28034 Index ! Page ranges
28042 \begin_layout Standard
28043 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
28045 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
28046 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
28047 an index entry in section
28048 \begin_inset space ~
28052 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28054 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
28061 \begin_layout Standard
28064 Paragraph environments|(
28067 \begin_layout Standard
28068 and another entry at the end of section
28069 \begin_inset space ~
28073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28075 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
28082 \begin_layout Standard
28085 Paragraph environments|)
28088 \begin_layout Standard
28090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28113 respectively start and end the index range.
28114 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
28115 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
28116 the pages of the indexed document parts.
28117 An example is the index entry
28118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28121 Document ! Settings
28122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28128 \begin_layout Subsection
28130 \begin_inset Index idx
28133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28134 Index ! Cross referencing
28142 \begin_layout Standard
28143 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
28144 We referred for example in the index entry
28145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28153 \begin_inset space ~
28157 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28159 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
28163 ) to the index entry
28164 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28168 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28171 in the same section using the entry
28174 \begin_layout Standard
28177 GIF|see{Image formats}
28180 \begin_layout Standard
28181 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
28183 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
28184 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
28187 \begin_layout Subsection
28189 \begin_inset Index idx
28192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28193 Index ! Entry order
28201 \begin_layout Standard
28202 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
28203 follow the rules for the index order.
28204 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
28209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28210 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
28212 \begin_inset space ~
28216 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28218 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28227 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
28228 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
28229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28253 \begin_inset Index idx
28256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28257 Dummy entries ! maïs
28263 \begin_inset Index idx
28266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28267 Dummy entries ! maître
28273 \begin_inset Index idx
28276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28277 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
28282 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
28283 maïs, maison, maître.
28284 To achieve this, we use the command
28287 \begin_layout Standard
28290 previous entry@current entry
28293 \begin_layout Standard
28294 In our case we want to have
28295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28310 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
28313 \begin_layout Standard
28319 \begin_layout Standard
28320 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
28321 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
28323 See the next subsection for an example.
28326 \begin_layout Standard
28327 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28333 \begin_layout Standard
28334 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28339 to generate the index (see sec.
28340 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28346 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28355 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28356 -package aeguill in sec.
28357 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28361 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28363 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
28367 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
28368 -packages although all these index
28369 commands start with
28370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28383 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28388 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28391 \begin_layout Standard
28403 \begin_layout Standard
28415 \begin_layout Subsection
28417 \begin_inset Index idx
28420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28421 Index ! Entry layout
28429 \begin_layout Standard
28430 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28431 \begin_inset Index idx
28434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28437 This is an italic dummy entry
28442 You can also format the page number using the character
28443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28450 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28451 -command without a backslash.
28452 We can write for example
28455 \begin_layout Standard
28458 italic page number:|textit
28461 \begin_layout Standard
28462 to get the page number in italic.
28463 \begin_inset Index idx
28466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28467 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28472 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
28473 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
28475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28491 \begin_inset space ~
28497 Have a look at section
28498 \begin_inset space ~
28502 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28504 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28508 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28512 \begin_layout Standard
28513 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28521 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28525 to generate the index, see sec.
28526 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28530 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28532 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28541 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28546 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28547 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28550 key "latexcompanion"
28562 \begin_layout Standard
28563 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28565 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28566 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28567 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28568 If so, put the following in the preamble
28571 \begin_layout Standard
28583 \begin_layout Standard
28587 \begin_layout Standard
28593 \begin_layout Standard
28594 in the index entry.
28595 \begin_inset Index idx
28598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28599 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28604 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28605 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28606 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28609 \begin_layout Standard
28610 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28611 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28612 a bold font for all index entries.
28613 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28625 documentation for details,
28626 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28628 key "makeindex,xindy"
28635 \begin_layout Subsection
28637 \begin_inset Index idx
28640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28647 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28649 name "subsec:Index-Program"
28656 \begin_layout Standard
28657 If the index generation program
28661 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
28662 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28666 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
28667 distribution, is used.
28671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28676 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28677 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28678 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28679 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28680 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28690 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
28692 dialog, see section
28693 \begin_inset space ~
28697 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28699 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
28704 The available options are listed and explained in
28705 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28707 key "makeindex,xindy"
28712 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28716 \begin_layout Standard
28717 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28718 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
28721 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28722 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28726 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28727 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28730 \begin_layout Subsection
28734 \begin_layout Standard
28735 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28736 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28744 next to the standard index.
28746 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28747 that add this feature.
28754 \begin_inset Index idx
28757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28759 -packages ! splitidx
28764 package to generate multiple indexes.
28765 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
28770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28771 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
28773 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28780 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28781 style, but it also includes
28782 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28783 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28791 \begin_layout Standard
28792 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
28793 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28795 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28796 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28799 and select the option
28801 Use multiple Indexes
28808 already contains the standard index
28809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28817 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28818 also appear as a heading) to the
28822 input field and press the
28827 The new index now also appears in the list.
28828 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
28829 label color to the new index.
28832 \begin_layout Standard
28833 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28836 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28843 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28844 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28845 are additional features:
28848 \begin_layout Itemize
28849 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28850 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28853 \begin_layout Itemize
28854 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28855 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28863 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28864 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28865 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28866 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28869 \begin_layout Section
28870 Nomenclature/Glossary
28871 \begin_inset Index idx
28874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28881 \begin_inset Index idx
28884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28913 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28915 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28922 \begin_layout Standard
28923 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28924 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28925 called nomenclature or glossary.
28928 \begin_layout Standard
28929 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28936 \begin_inset Index idx
28939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28941 -packages ! nomencl
28947 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
28949 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28955 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28959 \begin_layout Standard
28960 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28961 and then use the menu
28963 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28969 \begin_inset space ~
28974 or the toolbar button
28977 arg "nomencl-insert"
28982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28993 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28996 \begin_layout Standard
28997 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28998 The first is the term or
29002 that you wish to define.
29007 of the term or symbol.
29010 \begin_layout Standard
29011 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29019 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
29020 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
29028 \begin_layout Subsection
29029 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
29030 \begin_inset Index idx
29033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29034 Nomenclature ! Layout
29042 \begin_layout Standard
29043 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
29047 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
29050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29054 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29062 \begin_inset Newline newline
29070 \begin_inset Newline newline
29076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29083 character starts/ends the formula.
29084 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
29085 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
29087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29097 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
29107 \begin_layout Standard
29108 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29109 -syntax is given in section
29110 \begin_inset space ~
29114 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29116 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29123 \begin_layout Standard
29127 \begin_inset space ~
29132 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
29134 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
29135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29139 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29146 in this document is:
29147 \begin_inset Newline newline
29152 dummy entry for the character
29157 \begin_inset Newline newline
29169 \begin_inset space ~
29179 font use the command
29208 \begin_layout Standard
29209 If the characters |
29210 \begin_inset space \space{}
29214 \begin_inset space \space{}
29218 \begin_inset space \space{}
29222 \begin_inset space \space{}
29226 \begin_inset space \space{}
29229 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
29230 a quote character in front of them.
29231 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29232 LatexCommand nomenclature
29233 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
29234 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
29241 \begin_layout Subsection
29242 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
29243 \begin_inset Index idx
29246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29247 Nomenclature ! Sort order
29255 \begin_layout Standard
29256 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29257 -code of the symbol
29259 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
29261 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
29264 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29265 LatexCommand nomenclature
29267 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
29274 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29278 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29279 LatexCommand nomenclature
29282 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
29287 They will be sorted by
29288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29314 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29317 will be sorted before the
29321 since the character
29322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29329 is considered in sorting.
29332 \begin_layout Standard
29333 To control the sort order, you can edit the
29336 \begin_inset space ~
29341 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29342 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29344 For the example given, you can insert
29348 in this field for the
29349 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29356 will be located before
29357 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29363 \begin_layout Standard
29364 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29369 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29378 \begin_layout Subsection
29379 Nomenclature Options
29380 \begin_inset Index idx
29383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29384 Nomenclature ! Options
29392 \begin_layout Standard
29397 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29398 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29401 \begin_layout Description
29402 refeq Appends the phrase
29403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29418 to every nomenclature entry, where
29424 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29427 \begin_layout Description
29428 refpage Appends the phrase
29429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29444 to every nomenclature entry, where
29450 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29453 \begin_layout Description
29454 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29457 \begin_layout Standard
29458 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29459 class options list in the
29461 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29465 In this document the options
29472 \begin_layout Standard
29473 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29479 \begin_layout Standard
29480 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29481 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29486 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29489 \begin_layout Description
29499 \begin_layout Description
29502 nomrefpage Like the
29509 \begin_layout Description
29512 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29521 \begin_layout Description
29525 \begin_inset space ~
29531 \begin_inset space ~
29536 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29539 \begin_layout Standard
29541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29548 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29549 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29553 \begin_layout Standard
29561 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29564 \begin_inset Newline newline
29571 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29576 \begin_inset Newline newline
29580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29595 by their translation.
29598 \begin_layout Subsection
29599 Printing the Nomenclature
29600 \begin_inset Index idx
29603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29604 Nomenclature ! Printing
29612 \begin_layout Standard
29613 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29615 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29616 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29632 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29633 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29634 You can choose between these settings:
29637 \begin_layout Description
29638 Default a space of 1
29639 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29645 \begin_layout Description
29647 \begin_inset space ~
29651 \begin_inset space ~
29654 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29657 \begin_layout Description
29658 Custom custom space
29661 \begin_layout Standard
29662 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29671 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29679 For example, in order to change the name to
29683 , add the following line to the preamble:
29686 \begin_layout Standard
29694 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29697 \begin_layout Subsection
29698 Nomenclature Program
29699 \begin_inset Index idx
29702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29703 Nomenclature ! Program
29709 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29711 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
29718 \begin_layout Standard
29724 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
29725 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29727 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29732 by adding options, see section
29733 \begin_inset space ~
29737 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29739 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
29744 The available options are listed and explained in
29745 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29747 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29754 \begin_layout Section
29756 \begin_inset Index idx
29759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29766 \begin_inset Index idx
29769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29770 Document ! Branches
29776 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29778 name "sec:Branches"
29785 \begin_layout Standard
29786 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29787 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29788 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29789 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29792 \begin_layout Standard
29793 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
29794 allows you to put text into branches.
29795 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29796 To create a branch, either select the menu
29798 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29799 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
29802 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29804 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29811 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29812 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29813 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
29814 and whether the name of the branch should
29815 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29816 (see below for an example).
29817 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29818 to the name of the other) and to add
29819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29827 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29831 \begin_inset space ~
29834 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29835 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29838 \begin_layout Standard
29839 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29840 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29842 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29845 where you can choose a branch.
29846 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29850 \begin_layout Standard
29851 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29852 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29855 \begin_layout Standard
29856 \begin_inset Branch Question
29859 \begin_layout Standard
29860 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29868 \begin_layout Standard
29869 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29872 \begin_layout Standard
29873 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29881 \begin_layout Standard
29888 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29889 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29892 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29893 Consider for example a file
29894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29901 which has the above branches.
29903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29910 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29919 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29927 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29931 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29934 branch were inactive,
29935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29950 branch was active, likewise
29951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29966 branch was active, and
29967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29970 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29974 if both branches were active.
29975 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29978 \begin_layout Standard
29979 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29985 \begin_layout Standard
29986 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29987 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
29988 definitions for each branch.
29989 For example you can define for the question branch
29993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29994 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29995 -syntax, see section
29996 \begin_inset space ~
30000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30002 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30014 \begin_layout Standard
30024 \begin_layout Standard
30034 \begin_layout Standard
30035 and for the answer branch
30038 \begin_layout Standard
30048 \begin_layout Standard
30058 \begin_layout Standard
30059 \begin_inset Branch Question
30062 \begin_layout Standard
30066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30094 \begin_layout Standard
30095 \begin_inset Branch Answer
30098 \begin_layout Standard
30102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30130 \begin_layout Standard
30131 Now it is possible to use the
30135 question{\SpecialChar ldots
30142 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
30145 commands to obtain conditional output.
30146 Here is an example formula where only the
30153 \begin_inset Formula
30155 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
30163 \begin_layout Standard
30164 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
30172 \begin_layout Standard
30173 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
30175 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30179 \begin_inset space \space{}
30182 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
30184 For this advanced usage, see the
30189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30192 Flex insets and InsetLayout
30193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30199 \begin_layout Section
30201 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30203 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
30208 \begin_inset Index idx
30211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30220 \begin_layout Standard
30223 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30224 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30227 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
30229 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30235 \begin_inset Index idx
30238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30240 -packages ! hyperref
30245 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
30246 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
30247 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
30248 part of the document.
30252 \begin_layout Standard
30253 The header information in the dialog tab
30257 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
30258 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
30259 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
30260 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
30264 \begin_inset space ~
30268 \begin_inset space ~
30273 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
30274 tries to extract the header information from your document title
30275 and author entries.
30279 \begin_inset space ~
30283 \begin_inset space ~
30287 \begin_inset space ~
30292 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
30295 \begin_layout Standard
30296 You can specify in the dialog tab
30300 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
30305 \begin_inset space ~
30309 \begin_inset space ~
30313 \begin_inset space ~
30318 option allows long links to be split;
30321 \begin_inset space ~
30325 \begin_inset space ~
30329 \begin_inset space ~
30337 \begin_inset space ~
30342 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
30345 \begin_inset space ~
30350 colors the different links.
30351 The default colors are:
30354 \begin_layout Labeling
30355 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30360 for hyperlinks and URLs
30363 \begin_layout Labeling
30364 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30372 \begin_layout Labeling
30373 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30381 \begin_layout Standard
30382 but you can change these in the field
30387 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30390 \begin_layout Standard
30393 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30396 \begin_layout Standard
30401 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30402 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30403 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30406 \begin_layout Standard
30411 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30412 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30413 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30423 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30424 when opening the PDF.
30426 \begin_inset space ~
30429 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30430 \begin_inset space ~
30433 1 will only display the sections.
30436 \begin_layout Standard
30437 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30438 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30444 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30445 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30454 \begin_layout Section
30456 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30458 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30460 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30467 \begin_layout Subsection
30470 \begin_inset Index idx
30473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30481 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30483 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30490 \begin_layout Standard
30491 As \SpecialChar LyX
30492 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
30493 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
30494 commands and constructs,
30497 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30498 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30499 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30500 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30501 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
30502 cannot support all packages and
30506 \begin_layout Standard
30507 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
30508 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
30509 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
30513 Code box is created by the menu
30515 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30528 \begin_inset space ~
30533 or by the toolbar button
30546 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30554 \begin_layout Standard
30555 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
30557 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
30559 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30560 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30567 , you can write the command part
30573 in a \SpecialChar TeX
30574 Code box before the word and the closing brace
30578 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
30579 Code box behind the word.
30580 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
30581 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
30585 \begin_layout Standard
30586 \begin_inset Graphics
30587 filename clipart/ERT.png
30595 \begin_layout Standard
30599 \begin_layout Standard
30600 This is a line with a
30604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30627 \begin_layout Standard
30628 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30636 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30637 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30638 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
30639 know that the command is finished.
30647 \begin_layout Subsection
30648 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30650 \begin_inset Argument 1
30653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30654 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
30661 \begin_inset Index idx
30664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30672 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30674 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30681 \begin_layout Standard
30682 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30683 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30684 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
30685 uses in the background.
30686 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
30687 is based on commands, you can
30688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30696 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30697 any time if you know the right commands.
30698 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30699 is the end of the day.
30700 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30701 all caption labels bold.
30702 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30704 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30708 \begin_layout Standard
30709 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
30711 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30713 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30716 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30725 \begin_layout Standard
30726 As result you find that the package
30731 \begin_inset Index idx
30734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30736 -packages ! caption
30742 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30744 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30747 \SpecialChar menuseparator
30754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30762 \begin_inset space ~
30770 \begin_layout Standard
30775 usepackage[options]{package name}
30778 \begin_layout Standard
30779 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
30780 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30781 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30782 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30785 \begin_layout Standard
30786 In your case the package name is
30791 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30796 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30797 So you add the command
30800 \begin_layout Standard
30805 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30808 \begin_layout Standard
30809 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30814 For more commands provided by the
30818 package, have a look at its documentation,
30819 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30833 \begin_layout Standard
30834 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30836 For example if you use a
30840 class, you don't need the package
30844 , you can instead write
30847 \begin_layout Standard
30852 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30857 \begin_layout Standard
30858 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30859 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30860 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30867 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30870 \begin_layout Standard
30871 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30872 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30874 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30875 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
30876 Code box as described in the previous
30880 \begin_layout Standard
30881 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30882 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30885 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30887 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30894 \begin_layout Standard
30895 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30901 \begin_layout Standard
30905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30915 \begin_inset Note Note
30918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30919 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30927 \begin_layout Left Header
30928 \begin_inset Argument 1
30931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30951 \begin_inset Note Note
30954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30955 defines the header line as described below
30963 \begin_layout Center Header
30964 \begin_inset Argument 1
30967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30976 \begin_layout Right Header
30977 \begin_inset Argument 1
30980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31001 \begin_layout Left Footer
31002 \begin_inset Argument 1
31005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31026 \begin_layout Center Footer
31027 \begin_inset Argument 1
31030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31042 \begin_inset Newline newline
31046 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31052 \begin_layout Right Footer
31053 \begin_inset Argument 1
31056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31078 \begin_layout Section
31079 Customized Page Headers and Footers
31080 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31082 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
31087 \begin_inset Index idx
31090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31091 Document ! Header/Footer line
31097 \begin_inset Index idx
31100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31109 \begin_layout Standard
31110 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
31114 \begin_inset space ~
31125 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31131 \begin_inset space ~
31137 As a second step add in the menu
31139 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31140 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31147 Custom Header/Footerlines
31148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31152 This module offers the following 6
31153 \begin_inset space ~
31159 \begin_layout Description
31161 \begin_inset space ~
31165 \begin_inset space ~
31169 \begin_inset space ~
31173 \begin_inset space ~
31177 \begin_inset space ~
31183 \begin_layout Description
31185 \begin_inset space ~
31189 \begin_inset space ~
31193 \begin_inset space ~
31197 \begin_inset space ~
31201 \begin_inset space ~
31207 \begin_layout Standard
31208 for the different positions in the header/footer.
31211 \begin_layout Standard
31212 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
31213 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
31215 \begin_inset space ~
31219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31221 reference "fig:Page-layout"
31225 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
31228 \begin_layout Standard
31229 \begin_inset Float figure
31235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31238 \begin_inset Tabular
31239 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
31240 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
31241 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31242 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31243 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31245 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
31257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31263 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31274 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31292 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31303 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
31306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31307 The normal text on the page goes here.
31308 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
31310 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
31311 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
31316 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31325 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31336 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31354 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31365 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31383 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31401 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31404 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31406 name "fig:Page-layout"
31410 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31423 \begin_layout Standard
31424 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31432 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31436 \begin_inset space ~
31441 is set to “Default”.
31442 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31451 \begin_layout Subsection
31455 \begin_layout Standard
31456 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
31457 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
31458 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31459 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31461 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
31462 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31465 \begin_layout Standard
31466 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
31467 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31471 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31484 \begin_inset space ~
31492 \begin_layout Description
31495 thepage prints the current page number
31498 \begin_layout Description
31501 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31504 \begin_layout Description
31507 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31510 \begin_layout Description
31513 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31514 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31521 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31524 because it usually goes in a left header.
31527 \begin_layout Description
31530 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31531 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31533 It is normally used in the right header.
31536 \begin_layout Subsection
31537 Default header/footer
31540 \begin_layout Standard
31541 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31542 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31543 footer has the page number.
31544 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31545 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31546 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31549 \begin_inset space ~
31557 \begin_layout Subsection
31561 \begin_layout Standard
31562 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31563 Some pages are different.
31564 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
31565 a new part or chapter in your book.
31566 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31567 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31568 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31571 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31572 Header and footer decoration line
31575 \begin_layout Standard
31576 By default, you get a 0.4
31577 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31580 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31581 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31593 in the following way:
31596 \begin_layout Standard
31603 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31606 \begin_layout Standard
31607 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31616 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31617 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31623 \begin_layout Standard
31624 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31626 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
31627 \begin_inset space ~
31631 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31640 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31641 Several header/footer lines
31644 \begin_layout Standard
31645 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31646 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
31647 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31649 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31664 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31665 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31678 \begin_inset space ~
31686 \begin_layout Standard
31693 headheight}{height}
31696 \begin_layout Standard
31697 where height is a size in standard units.
31698 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
31699 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31700 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31701 logfile with the menu
31703 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31721 \begin_inset space ~
31726 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31731 \begin_inset Index idx
31734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31736 -packages ! fancyhdr
31742 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31743 for your header/footer.
31746 \begin_layout Subsection
31750 \begin_layout Standard
31751 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31752 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31753 This example consists of the following definition:
31756 \begin_layout Description
31758 \begin_inset space ~
31767 , empty optional argument
31770 \begin_layout Description
31772 \begin_inset space ~
31775 Header empty, empty optional argument
31778 \begin_layout Description
31780 \begin_inset space ~
31789 in the optional argument
31792 \begin_layout Description
31794 \begin_inset space ~
31803 in the optional argument
31806 \begin_layout Description
31808 \begin_inset space ~
31821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31825 \begin_inset Newline newline
31829 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31836 in the optional argument
31839 \begin_layout Description
31841 \begin_inset space ~
31850 , empty optional argument
31853 \begin_layout Description
31856 headrulewidth set to 2
31857 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31863 \begin_layout Standard
31864 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31865 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31871 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31880 \begin_layout Standard
31881 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31887 \begin_layout Standard
31891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31895 pagestyle{headings}
31901 \begin_inset Note Note
31904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31905 switches back to page style with the default headings
31913 \begin_layout Section
31914 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31915 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31917 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31922 \begin_inset Index idx
31925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31932 \begin_inset Index idx
31935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31944 \begin_layout Standard
31946 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
31947 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31948 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31951 \begin_layout Subsection
31955 \begin_layout Standard
31956 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31962 \begin_inset Index idx
31965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31967 -packages ! preview-latex
31972 (on some systems named simply
31977 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31979 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31985 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31987 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31995 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
31996 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31997 -package are automatically
31998 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
32002 \begin_layout Subsection
32006 \begin_layout Standard
32007 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
32008 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
32010 activate the option
32013 \begin_inset space ~
32020 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32026 \begin_inset space ~
32030 \begin_inset space ~
32033 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
32040 \begin_inset space ~
32053 \begin_inset space ~
32058 is the multiplication factor for the size.
32061 \begin_layout Standard
32062 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
32067 \begin_inset space ~
32075 \begin_inset space ~
32083 \begin_layout Standard
32084 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
32085 and when you finish
32089 \begin_layout Standard
32090 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32098 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
32099 generated by activating the option
32102 \begin_inset space ~
32108 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
32116 \begin_layout Subsection
32117 Selected document parts
32120 \begin_layout Standard
32121 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
32122 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
32123 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
32124 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32126 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
32128 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32132 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
32133 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
32134 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
32137 \begin_layout Standard
32138 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32145 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32157 is explained in section
32159 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
32164 \begin_inset space ~
32174 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
32175 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
32176 the final rotated boxes,
32177 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
32178 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
32180 Here is the result:
32183 \begin_layout Standard
32184 \begin_inset Preview
32186 \begin_layout Standard
32191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32195 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
32201 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
32211 height_special "totalheight"
32216 backgroundcolor "none"
32219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32244 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
32250 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
32257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32272 \begin_layout Standard
32273 Previewing works also for colors.
32274 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32293 is explained in section
32300 \begin_inset space ~
32313 \begin_layout Standard
32314 \begin_inset Preview
32316 \begin_layout Standard
32320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32339 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
32344 This is text within a colored, framed box.
32348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32363 \begin_layout Standard
32364 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
32370 \begin_layout Standard
32371 If \SpecialChar LyX
32372 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
32373 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
32374 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
32375 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32376 packages in your document preamble that are required by
32377 the \SpecialChar TeX
32379 If \SpecialChar LyX
32380 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
32381 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
32383 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
32384 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
32385 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
32388 \begin_layout Subsection
32393 \begin_layout Standard
32394 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32395 source of the whole document or parts of it.
32398 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
32400 \begin_inset space ~
32405 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32407 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32409 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
32410 's main window, then only this selection
32411 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32412 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32413 the source view window.
32418 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
32419 ; but note that if you have
32420 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
32422 not just the one which is open at the time.
32425 \begin_layout Section
32426 Advanced Find and Replace
32427 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32429 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32434 \begin_inset Index idx
32437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32444 \begin_inset Index idx
32447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32456 \begin_layout Subsection
32460 \begin_layout Standard
32461 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
32462 allows for searching of complex,
32463 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
32465 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32466 The key-features are:
32469 \begin_layout Itemize
32470 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32471 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32472 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32476 \begin_layout Itemize
32477 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32478 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32479 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32480 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32483 \begin_layout Itemize
32484 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32485 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32486 outside of mathematics environments
32489 \begin_layout Itemize
32490 Search may be widened to a specific
32495 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32499 \begin_inset space ~
32502 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32503 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32510 \begin_layout Itemize
32511 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32512 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32513 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32517 \begin_inset space ~
32520 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32523 \begin_layout Subsection
32527 \begin_layout Standard
32528 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32530 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32543 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32546 ) or the toolbar button
32549 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32555 Advanced Find and Replace
32560 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32564 \begin_layout Standard
32570 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32574 \begin_inset space ~
32579 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32582 arg "paragraph-break"
32586 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32587 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32591 arg "paragraph-break"
32594 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32598 searches backwards.
32601 \begin_layout Standard
32605 \begin_inset space ~
32610 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32619 \begin_inset space ~
32624 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32627 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32628 Searching for mathematics
32631 \begin_layout Standard
32632 Mathematical formulas, such as
32633 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32636 or something more complex like
32637 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32640 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32645 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32646 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32647 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32648 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
32654 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32658 \begin_layout Standard
32659 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32660 This is done by switching to the
32664 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32669 This way, entering in the
32676 \begin_layout Itemize
32677 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32678 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32681 \begin_layout Itemize
32682 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32683 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32686 \begin_layout Itemize
32687 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32688 of it only within section headings.
32689 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32690 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32694 \begin_layout Itemize
32695 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32696 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32699 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32703 \begin_layout Standard
32704 The entries made in the
32708 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32711 \begin_inset space ~
32717 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32721 button or alternatively press
32724 arg "paragraph-break"
32731 while the cursor is in the
32734 \begin_inset space ~
32742 \begin_layout Standard
32743 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
32745 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32749 \begin_layout Itemize
32750 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32751 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32759 with its typewriter version
32760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32774 \begin_layout Itemize
32775 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32781 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32785 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32793 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32800 (you may want to enable the
32803 \begin_inset space ~
32811 \begin_inset space ~
32816 options and disable the
32824 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32825 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32832 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32833 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32837 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
32840 , or occurrences of
32841 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32845 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32851 \begin_layout Subsection
32855 \begin_layout Standard
32856 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32861 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32863 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32865 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32874 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32880 This is done with the context menu
32882 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32883 Insert Regular Expression
32885 while the cursor is in the
32890 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32891 expression matching rules
32895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32896 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
32899 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32903 \begin_inset space ~
32906 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
32907 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
32913 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32914 same text in the document.
32915 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32916 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32919 \begin_layout Enumerate
32920 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32925 editor the fraction
32926 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32930 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32933 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32934 fractions with the given denominator.
32937 \begin_layout Enumerate
32938 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32950 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32955 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32956 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32957 Also, by inserting a
32958 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32961 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32962 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32965 \begin_layout Standard
32966 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32967 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32968 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32971 , and referring back to them through
32972 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32976 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32980 For example, try searching with the regexp
32981 \begin_inset Newline newline
32984 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32987 \begin_inset Newline newline
32990 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32993 \begin_layout Standard
32994 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32997 \begin_layout Standard
32998 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33006 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
33007 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
33008 sub-expressions is absolute.
33010 \begin_inset space ~
33014 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
33017 always refers to the first occurrence of
33018 \begin_inset Formula $()$
33021 in all entered regexps.
33029 \begin_layout Section
33031 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33033 name "sec:Spellchecking"
33038 \begin_inset Index idx
33041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33050 \begin_layout Standard
33052 has a built-in spell checker.
33055 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33062 key or the toolbar button
33065 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
33068 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
33069 beginning of the currently selected text.
33070 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
33071 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
33072 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
33073 scrolled so that it is visible.
33074 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
33075 n, if any could be found.
33076 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
33080 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
33081 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
33084 \begin_layout Standard
33085 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
33088 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33092 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
33093 a different one at the top of the dialog.
33095 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
33096 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
33099 \begin_inset space ~
33107 arg "dialog-show character"
33110 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
33112 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
33115 \begin_layout Standard
33116 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
33117 can be downloaded from here:
33118 \begin_inset Newline newline
33122 \begin_inset Flex URL
33125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33127 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
33133 \begin_inset Newline newline
33137 \begin_inset space ~
33140 files for each language.
33141 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
33142 \begin_inset space ~
33145 files into \SpecialChar LyX
33146 's installation subfolder
33154 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33156 \begin_inset Newline newline
33159 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
33160 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
33161 but in most cases these are
33177 is the language code.
33180 \begin_layout Subsection
33184 \begin_layout Standard
33187 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33188 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33190 \begin_inset space ~
33193 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33196 you can set the following things:
33199 \begin_layout Description
33201 \begin_inset space ~
33204 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
33205 should use for spell checking.
33206 Depending on your platform,
33220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33221 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
33222 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
33237 \begin_layout Description
33239 \begin_inset space ~
33242 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
33243 will always use the given language
33244 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
33247 \begin_layout Description
33249 \begin_inset space ~
33252 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
33254 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33258 \begin_inset space \space{}
33262 This should normally not be needed.
33265 \begin_layout Description
33267 \begin_inset space ~
33271 \begin_inset space ~
33274 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
33276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33286 \begin_layout Description
33288 \begin_inset space ~
33291 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
33292 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
33293 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
33294 appear in a context menu.
33295 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
33299 \begin_layout Description
33301 \begin_inset space ~
33305 \begin_inset space ~
33309 \begin_inset space ~
33312 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
33316 \begin_layout Section
33318 \begin_inset Index idx
33321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33328 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33330 name "sec:Thesaurus"
33337 \begin_layout Standard
33339 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
33340 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
33349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33350 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33352 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
33361 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
33363 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
33364 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
33365 which are available for many languages.
33368 \begin_layout Standard
33369 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
33370 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
33374 \begin_layout Subsection
33375 Setting up the thesaurus
33378 \begin_layout Standard
33387 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
33391 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
33396 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
33398 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33402 \begin_inset space ~
33410 For instance, the US English files are named:
33413 \begin_layout Itemize
33417 \begin_layout Itemize
33421 \begin_layout Standard
33430 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33431 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
33434 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33435 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33436 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33438 \begin_inset space ~
33443 ) to the path where they are installed.
33447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33448 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33449 ies, typical locations are
33455 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33459 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33463 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33466 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33472 LibreOffice-<Version>
33479 On the Mac, the default location is
33481 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
33482 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33483 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
33484 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
33485 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33486 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33494 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33495 during the \SpecialChar LyX
33496 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
33500 \begin_layout Standard
33501 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
33502 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33506 \begin_layout Itemize
33507 \begin_inset Flex URL
33510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33512 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33520 \begin_layout Standard
33521 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33522 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33524 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33525 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33526 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33528 \begin_inset space ~
33533 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33535 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33536 and point \SpecialChar LyX
33540 \begin_layout Standard
33541 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33543 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33546 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33552 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33555 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
33556 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33558 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33564 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33565 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33566 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33568 \begin_inset space ~
33573 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33576 \begin_layout Subsection
33577 Using the thesaurus
33580 \begin_layout Standard
33581 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33583 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33586 or the toolbar button
33589 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33592 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33594 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33596 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33597 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33598 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33607 ), related terms (such as
33610 \begin_inset space ~
33619 ), compounds (such as
33622 \begin_inset space ~
33631 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33640 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33643 \begin_layout Standard
33644 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33645 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33649 \begin_layout Standard
33650 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33651 the dictionary, such as the above
33655 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33656 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33660 \begin_inset space \space{}
33663 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33664 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33665 For example, looking up the word form
33669 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33674 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33675 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33679 \begin_inset space \space{}
33690 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33691 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33692 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33695 \begin_layout Section
33697 \begin_inset Index idx
33700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33707 \begin_inset Index idx
33710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33711 Document ! Change Tracking
33717 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33719 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33726 \begin_layout Standard
33727 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33728 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33729 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33730 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33732 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33734 \begin_inset space ~
33737 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33739 \begin_inset space ~
33747 \begin_layout Standard
33748 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33762 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33763 You can change the color in
33765 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33766 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33768 \begin_inset space ~
33772 \begin_inset space ~
33777 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33783 \begin_inset Index idx
33786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33787 Color ! Change tracking
33792 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
33793 's status bar when the
33794 cursor is in changed text.
33795 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33798 arg "changes-merge"
33804 \begin_layout Standard
33805 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
33807 \begin_inset Index idx
33810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33819 \begin_layout Standard
33820 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33826 \begin_layout Standard
33827 \begin_inset Graphics
33828 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33836 \begin_layout Standard
33837 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33843 \begin_layout Standard
33844 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33847 \begin_layout Standard
33848 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33854 \begin_layout Standard
33855 \begin_inset Tabular
33856 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33857 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33858 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33859 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33860 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33869 arg "changes-track"
33877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33883 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33885 \begin_inset space ~
33888 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33890 \begin_inset space ~
33899 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33908 arg "changes-output"
33916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33922 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33924 \begin_inset space ~
33927 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33929 \begin_inset space ~
33933 \begin_inset space ~
33937 \begin_inset space ~
33946 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33967 Jumps to the next change
33973 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33982 arg "change-accept"
33990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33996 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33998 \begin_inset space ~
34001 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34003 \begin_inset space ~
34012 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34021 arg "change-reject"
34029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34035 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34037 \begin_inset space ~
34040 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34042 \begin_inset space ~
34051 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34060 arg "changes-merge"
34068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34074 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34076 \begin_inset space ~
34079 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34081 \begin_inset space ~
34090 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34099 arg "all-changes-accept"
34107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34113 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34115 \begin_inset space ~
34118 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34120 \begin_inset space ~
34124 \begin_inset space ~
34133 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34142 arg "all-changes-reject"
34150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34156 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34158 \begin_inset space ~
34161 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34163 \begin_inset space ~
34167 \begin_inset space ~
34176 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34199 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34200 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
34205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34213 \begin_inset space ~
34222 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34245 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
34247 \begin_inset space ~
34263 \begin_layout Standard
34264 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
34270 \begin_layout Standard
34271 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
34291 \begin_layout Standard
34292 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
34293 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
34294 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
34295 the next change after the current cursor position.
34296 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
34297 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
34298 step to the next change.
34299 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
34302 \begin_layout Standard
34303 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
34304 to describe a change.
34307 \begin_layout Standard
34308 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34314 \begin_inset Index idx
34317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34319 -packages ! dvipost
34325 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34327 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34333 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34337 \begin_layout Section
34338 Comparison of Documents
34339 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34341 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
34346 \begin_inset Index idx
34349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34350 Comparison of documents
34358 \begin_layout Standard
34359 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
34362 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34366 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
34367 file with change tracking enabled showing the
34369 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
34371 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
34375 \begin_inset space ~
34379 \begin_inset space ~
34383 \begin_inset space ~
34392 \begin_inset space ~
34396 \begin_inset space ~
34400 \begin_inset space ~
34404 \begin_inset space ~
34408 \begin_inset space ~
34412 \begin_inset space ~
34417 enables the change tracking option
34420 \begin_inset space ~
34424 \begin_inset space ~
34428 \begin_inset space ~
34433 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
34436 \begin_layout Section
34437 International Support
34438 \begin_inset Index idx
34441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34442 International support
34450 \begin_layout Standard
34451 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
34452 with any language you want.
34453 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34454 up \SpecialChar LyX
34456 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34458 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34465 \begin_layout Standard
34466 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
34467 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34468 \begin_inset space ~
34472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34474 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
34481 \begin_layout Subsection
34483 \begin_inset Index idx
34486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34493 \begin_inset Index idx
34496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34497 Document ! Settings
34503 \begin_inset Index idx
34506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34507 Document ! Language
34515 \begin_layout Standard
34518 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34519 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34522 dialog lets you set
34524 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34529 \begin_layout Standard
34534 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
34539 \begin_inset space ~
34544 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34545 For details about the different encoding options see section
34546 \begin_inset space ~
34550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34552 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34559 \begin_layout Subsection
34560 Keyboard mapping configuration
34561 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34563 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
34570 \begin_layout Standard
34571 If you have for example a U.
34572 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34575 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34576 can use an alternate keymap.
34577 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
34582 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34583 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34584 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
34587 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34588 \begin_inset space ~
34592 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34594 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
34599 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34600 which one you want to use.
34603 \begin_layout Standard
34604 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34605 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34606 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34607 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34610 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34611 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34612 one to support the characters you want.
34613 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34620 \begin_layout Chapter
34623 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34625 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34632 \begin_layout Standard
34633 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34634 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34635 topic inside the user's guide.
34638 \begin_layout Section
34640 \begin_inset Index idx
34643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34652 \begin_layout Standard
34657 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34660 \begin_layout Subsection
34664 \begin_layout Standard
34665 Creates a new document.
34668 \begin_layout Subsection
34672 \begin_layout Standard
34673 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34674 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34675 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34678 \begin_layout Subsection
34682 \begin_layout Standard
34686 \begin_layout Subsection
34690 \begin_layout Standard
34691 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34692 Click there on a file to open it.
34695 \begin_layout Subsection
34699 \begin_layout Standard
34700 Closes the current document.
34703 \begin_layout Subsection
34707 \begin_layout Standard
34708 Closes all opened documents.
34711 \begin_layout Subsection
34715 \begin_layout Standard
34716 Saves the actual document.
34719 \begin_layout Subsection
34723 \begin_layout Standard
34724 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34727 \begin_layout Subsection
34731 \begin_layout Standard
34732 Saves all opened documents.
34735 \begin_layout Subsection
34739 \begin_layout Standard
34740 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34743 \begin_layout Subsection
34747 \begin_layout Standard
34748 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34749 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34750 It is described in the section
34752 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
34757 Additional Features
34762 \begin_layout Subsection
34766 \begin_layout Standard
34767 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
34768 -versions, HTML-files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
34769 -files, NoWeb-files,
34770 plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
34771 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
34775 \begin_layout Standard
34776 When using the menu entry
34779 \begin_inset space ~
34784 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34788 \begin_inset space ~
34792 \begin_inset space ~
34796 \begin_inset space ~
34801 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34802 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34805 \begin_layout Subsection
34807 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34809 name "subsec:Export"
34816 \begin_layout Standard
34817 You can export your document to various file formats.
34818 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
34820 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34821 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
34822 during its configuration.
34825 \begin_layout Standard
34826 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34828 \begin_inset space ~
34832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34834 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
34841 \begin_layout Description
34847 \begin_inset space ~
34854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34861 yX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
34863 \begin_inset space ~
34866 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34867 \begin_inset Newline newline
34870 Since \SpecialChar LyX
34871 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
34875 \begin_layout Description
34876 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34882 \begin_layout Description
34884 \begin_inset space ~
34887 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34893 \begin_layout Description
34894 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
34895 's native DVI-format.
34896 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34897 files paths or file names in your document.
34899 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34906 \begin_layout Description
34907 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34908 in files paths or file names
34911 \begin_layout Description
34913 \begin_inset space ~
34920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34927 eX) DVI-format using the program
34929 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34932 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
34936 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34944 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34952 \begin_layout Description
34954 \begin_inset space ~
34957 (cropped) the same as
34961 but with cropped page margins.
34964 \begin_layout Description
34966 \begin_inset space ~
34969 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34973 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34978 \begin_layout Description
34982 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34990 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
34998 \begin_layout Description
35000 \begin_inset space ~
35004 \begin_inset space ~
35007 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
35011 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
35019 \begin_layout Description
35026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35034 \begin_inset space ~
35045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35058 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35059 source that is compilable with the program
35061 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
35065 \begin_layout Description
35072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35080 \begin_inset space ~
35085 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35086 source, additionally all images used in the document
35087 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
35091 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
35094 \begin_layout Description
35101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35109 \begin_inset space ~
35114 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35115 source code, additionally all images used in the document
35116 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
35124 \begin_layout Description
35131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35139 \begin_inset space ~
35150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35163 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35164 source that is compilable with the program
35170 \begin_layout Description
35172 \begin_inset space ~
35176 \begin_inset space ~
35185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35195 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35196 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
35202 \begin_layout Description
35209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35219 \begin_inset space ~
35222 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
35223 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
35225 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35229 \begin_inset space \space{}
35234 \begin_inset space ~
35238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35253 represent the version number)
35256 \begin_layout Description
35263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35273 \begin_inset space ~
35277 \begin_inset space ~
35280 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
35281 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
35282 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35286 \begin_layout Description
35293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35302 yXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
35303 's internal XHTML engine
35306 \begin_layout Description
35307 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
35312 \begin_layout Description
35313 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
35315 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
35318 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
35322 \begin_layout Description
35324 \begin_inset space ~
35327 (cropped) the same as
35330 \begin_inset space ~
35335 but with cropped page margins
35338 \begin_layout Description
35342 \begin_inset space ~
35347 PDF-format using the program
35351 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35354 \begin_layout Description
35358 \begin_inset space ~
35362 \begin_inset space ~
35370 \begin_inset space ~
35375 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
35376 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35380 \begin_inset space \space{}
35383 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
35387 \begin_layout Description
35391 \begin_inset space ~
35398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35407 PDF-format using the program
35409 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
35412 , produces PDF-files directly
35415 \begin_layout Description
35419 \begin_inset space ~
35424 PDF-format using the program
35428 , produces PDF-files directly
35431 \begin_layout Description
35435 \begin_inset space ~
35440 PDF-format using the program
35444 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35447 \begin_layout Description
35451 \begin_inset space ~
35458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35467 PDF-format using the program
35472 , produces PDF-files directly
35475 \begin_layout Description
35479 \begin_inset space ~
35487 \begin_layout Description
35491 \begin_inset space ~
35495 \begin_inset space ~
35500 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
35501 and then exported as text using the program
35506 \begin_layout Description
35511 PostScript format using the program
35516 \begin_layout Description
35517 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35518 source and also code in the statistical programming
35532 it is possible to use
35536 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
35540 \begin_layout Standard
35541 If one of the menu entries
35548 \begin_inset space ~
35557 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35559 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
35561 \begin_inset space ~
35565 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35567 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35572 \begin_inset Index idx
35575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35576 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
35585 \begin_layout Subsection
35589 \begin_layout Standard
35590 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35591 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
35594 \begin_inset space ~
35598 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35600 reference "sec:Paths"
35605 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35614 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35615 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
35616 's preferences as described in section
35617 \begin_inset space ~
35621 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35623 reference "subsec:Converters"
35630 \begin_layout Subsection
35631 New and Close Window
35634 \begin_layout Standard
35635 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
35639 \begin_layout Subsection
35643 \begin_layout Standard
35644 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35647 \begin_layout Section
35649 \begin_inset Index idx
35652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35661 \begin_layout Subsection
35665 \begin_layout Standard
35666 Described in section
35667 \begin_inset space ~
35671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35673 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35680 \begin_layout Subsection
35681 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35684 \begin_layout Standard
35685 Described in section
35686 \begin_inset space ~
35690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35692 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35699 \begin_layout Subsection
35703 \begin_layout Standard
35704 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35705 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35708 \begin_layout Subsection
35712 \begin_layout Standard
35713 Selects the whole document.
35716 \begin_layout Subsection
35717 Find & Replace (Quick)
35720 \begin_layout Standard
35721 Described in section
35722 \begin_inset space ~
35726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35728 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35735 \begin_layout Subsection
35736 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35739 \begin_layout Standard
35740 Described in section
35741 \begin_inset space ~
35745 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35747 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35754 \begin_layout Subsection
35755 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35758 \begin_layout Standard
35759 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35763 \begin_layout Subsection
35767 \begin_layout Standard
35768 Described in section
35769 \begin_inset space ~
35773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35775 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35782 \begin_layout Subsection
35784 \begin_inset Index idx
35787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35788 Paragraph ! Settings
35796 \begin_layout Standard
35797 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35798 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35802 \begin_layout Standard
35803 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35804 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35810 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35811 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35813 \begin_inset space ~
35821 \begin_layout Subsection
35825 \begin_layout Standard
35826 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
35827 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35828 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
35832 \begin_layout Standard
35833 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
35835 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
35836 The properties of tables are described in section
35837 \begin_inset space ~
35841 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35843 reference "sec:Tables"
35847 , the properties of formulas in chapter
35848 \begin_inset space ~
35852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35854 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35861 \begin_layout Subsection
35862 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35865 \begin_layout Standard
35866 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
35868 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35869 \begin_inset space ~
35873 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35875 reference "sec:Nesting"
35880 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35882 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
35889 \begin_layout Subsection
35892 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
35895 \begin_layout Standard
35896 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
35897 nts of the same type.
35899 \begin_inset space ~
35903 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35905 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
35909 for an explanation.
35912 \begin_layout Section
35914 \begin_inset Index idx
35917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35926 \begin_layout Standard
35927 At the bottom of the
35931 menu the opened documents are listed.
35934 \begin_layout Subsection
35935 Open/Close all Insets
35938 \begin_layout Standard
35939 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35942 \begin_layout Subsection
35943 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35946 \begin_layout Standard
35947 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35950 \begin_layout Standard
35951 Math macros are described in the
35958 \begin_layout Subsection
35962 \begin_layout Standard
35963 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35964 \begin_inset space ~
35968 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35970 reference "sec:Navigating"
35975 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35977 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
35984 \begin_layout Subsection
35988 \begin_layout Standard
35989 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35991 \begin_inset space ~
35995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35997 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36004 \begin_layout Subsection
36008 \begin_layout Standard
36009 Opens a window showing console messages.
36010 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
36012 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36015 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
36016 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
36017 is processing the document.
36020 \begin_layout Subsection
36022 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36024 name "subsec:Toolbars"
36029 \begin_inset Index idx
36032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36041 \begin_layout Standard
36042 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
36043 All toolbars and the
36046 \begin_inset space ~
36051 can be turned on and off.
36056 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
36068 \begin_inset space ~
36080 \begin_inset space ~
36085 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
36089 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
36096 \begin_layout Standard
36101 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
36105 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
36106 or when a certain feature is enabled.
36107 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
36108 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
36109 is inside a formula or table respectively.
36112 \begin_layout Standard
36114 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
36115 \begin_inset space ~
36119 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36121 reference "sec:Toolbars"
36128 \begin_layout Subsection
36132 \begin_layout Standard
36136 \begin_inset space ~
36140 \begin_inset space ~
36144 \begin_inset space ~
36148 \begin_inset space ~
36152 \begin_inset space ~
36156 \begin_inset space ~
36161 will split \SpecialChar LyX
36162 's main window vertically while
36165 \begin_inset space ~
36169 \begin_inset space ~
36173 \begin_inset space ~
36177 \begin_inset space ~
36181 \begin_inset space ~
36185 \begin_inset space ~
36190 will split it horizontally.
36191 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
36192 to view the same document, but at different positions.
36193 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
36194 three or more documents at the same time.
36195 To close a split view, use the menu
36198 \begin_inset space ~
36202 \begin_inset space ~
36210 \begin_layout Subsection
36214 \begin_layout Standard
36215 Closes a split view.
36218 \begin_layout Subsection
36222 \begin_layout Standard
36223 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
36224 so that you will see nothing but your text.
36225 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
36226 's main window fullscreen.
36227 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
36228 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
36231 \begin_layout Section
36233 \begin_inset Index idx
36236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36245 \begin_layout Subsection
36249 \begin_layout Standard
36250 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
36251 \begin_inset space ~
36255 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36257 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
36268 \begin_layout Subsection
36270 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36272 name "subsec:Special-Character"
36279 \begin_layout Standard
36280 Here you can insert the following characters:
36283 \begin_layout Description
36288 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
36291 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
36292 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36293 -packages you have installed.
36294 You can get a complete display by checking
36297 \begin_inset space ~
36303 \begin_inset Newline newline
36307 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36315 Not all characters will be visible in the
36319 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
36321 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36327 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
36331 ) can display every character.
36339 \begin_layout Description
36340 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
36344 \begin_layout Description
36346 \begin_inset space ~
36350 \begin_inset space ~
36353 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
36354 \begin_inset space ~
36358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36360 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
36367 \begin_layout Description
36369 \begin_inset space ~
36372 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
36375 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36376 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36382 \begin_layout Description
36384 \begin_inset space ~
36387 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
36390 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36391 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36397 \begin_layout Description
36399 \begin_inset space ~
36402 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
36406 \begin_layout Description
36408 \begin_inset space ~
36411 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
36415 \begin_layout Description
36417 \begin_inset space ~
36420 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
36426 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36432 \begin_layout Description
36434 \begin_inset space ~
36437 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
36441 \begin_layout Description
36443 \begin_inset space ~
36447 \begin_inset Index idx
36450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36457 \begin_inset Index idx
36460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36461 Language ! Phonetic symbols
36466 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
36467 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
36469 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36475 \begin_inset Index idx
36478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36486 \begin_inset Newline newline
36489 More information about this feature can be found in the
36495 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
36501 \begin_layout Subsection
36505 \begin_layout Standard
36506 Opens a submenu with the following options:
36509 \begin_layout Description
36510 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
36511 \begin_inset script superscript
36513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36522 \begin_layout Description
36523 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
36524 \begin_inset script subscript
36526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36535 \begin_layout Description
36537 \begin_inset space ~
36540 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
36541 \begin_inset space ~
36545 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36547 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
36554 \begin_layout Description
36556 \begin_inset space ~
36559 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
36560 \begin_inset space ~
36564 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36566 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
36573 \begin_layout Description
36575 \begin_inset space ~
36578 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36579 \begin_inset space ~
36583 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36585 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
36592 \begin_layout Description
36594 \begin_inset space ~
36597 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36599 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36603 \begin_inset space \space{}
36606 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36607 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
36613 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36616 To insert a fraction use the command
36621 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36625 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36634 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36641 \begin_layout Description
36643 \begin_inset space ~
36646 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36647 \begin_inset space ~
36651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36653 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
36660 \begin_layout Description
36662 \begin_inset space ~
36665 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36666 \begin_inset space ~
36670 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36672 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
36679 \begin_layout Description
36681 \begin_inset space ~
36684 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36685 \begin_inset space ~
36689 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36691 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
36698 \begin_layout Description
36699 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36700 \begin_inset space ~
36704 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36706 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
36713 \begin_layout Description
36715 \begin_inset space ~
36718 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36719 \begin_inset space ~
36723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36725 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
36732 \begin_layout Description
36734 \begin_inset space ~
36737 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36738 \begin_inset space ~
36742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36744 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
36751 \begin_layout Description
36753 \begin_inset space ~
36757 \begin_inset space ~
36760 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36761 \begin_inset space ~
36765 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36767 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36774 \begin_layout Description
36776 \begin_inset space ~
36779 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36780 as described in section
36781 \begin_inset space ~
36785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36787 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36794 \begin_layout Description
36796 \begin_inset space ~
36799 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36800 \begin_inset space ~
36804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36806 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36813 \begin_layout Description
36815 \begin_inset space ~
36818 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36819 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36821 \begin_inset space ~
36825 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36827 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36834 \begin_layout Description
36836 \begin_inset space ~
36839 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36840 \begin_inset space ~
36844 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36846 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36853 \begin_layout Description
36855 \begin_inset space ~
36859 \begin_inset space ~
36862 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36863 \begin_inset space ~
36867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36869 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36876 \begin_layout Subsection
36880 \begin_layout Standard
36881 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36885 \begin_inset space ~
36906 are described in section
36907 \begin_inset space ~
36911 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36913 reference "sec:toc"
36922 is described in section
36923 \begin_inset space ~
36927 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36929 reference "sec:Index"
36937 is described in section
36938 \begin_inset space ~
36942 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36944 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36950 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36953 is described in section
36954 \begin_inset space ~
36958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36960 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
36967 \begin_layout Subsection
36971 \begin_layout Standard
36972 To insert floats, as described in section
36973 \begin_inset space ~
36977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36979 reference "sec:Floats"
36983 and in detail the chapter
36990 \begin_inset space ~
36998 \begin_layout Subsection
37002 \begin_layout Standard
37003 To insert notes, described in section
37004 \begin_inset space ~
37008 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37010 reference "sec:Notes"
37017 \begin_layout Subsection
37021 \begin_layout Standard
37022 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
37024 Branches are described in section
37025 \begin_inset space ~
37029 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37031 reference "sec:Branches"
37038 \begin_layout Subsection
37042 \begin_layout Standard
37043 Inserts document class-specific insets.
37044 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
37046 An example is the document class
37047 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37054 with three custom insets.
37057 Flex insets and InsetLayout
37061 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
37067 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
37070 \begin_layout Subsection
37072 \begin_inset Index idx
37075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37084 \begin_layout Standard
37085 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
37087 For more information see chapter
37089 External Document Parts
37092 \begin_inset space ~
37098 \begin_layout Subsection
37100 \begin_inset Index idx
37103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37112 \begin_layout Standard
37113 Inserts a box in a certain style.
37114 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
37121 \begin_inset space ~
37129 \begin_layout Subsection
37133 \begin_layout Standard
37138 dialog as described in section
37139 \begin_inset space ~
37143 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37145 reference "sec:Bibliography"
37152 \begin_layout Subsection
37156 \begin_layout Standard
37161 as described in section
37162 \begin_inset space ~
37166 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37168 reference "sec:Cross-References"
37175 \begin_layout Subsection
37179 \begin_layout Standard
37184 as described in section
37185 \begin_inset space ~
37189 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37191 reference "sec:Cross-References"
37198 \begin_layout Subsection
37200 \begin_inset Index idx
37203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37210 \begin_inset Index idx
37213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37214 Longtables ! Caption
37222 \begin_layout Standard
37223 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
37224 Floats are described in section
37225 \begin_inset space ~
37229 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37231 reference "sec:Floats"
37235 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
37242 \begin_inset space ~
37250 \begin_layout Subsection
37254 \begin_layout Standard
37255 Inserts an index entry as described in section
37256 \begin_inset space ~
37260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37262 reference "sec:Index"
37269 \begin_layout Subsection
37273 \begin_layout Standard
37274 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
37275 \begin_inset space ~
37279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37281 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
37288 \begin_layout Subsection
37292 \begin_layout Standard
37293 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
37294 Tables are described in section
37295 \begin_inset space ~
37299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37301 reference "sec:Tables"
37305 and in detail in the chapter
37312 \begin_inset space ~
37320 \begin_layout Subsection
37324 \begin_layout Standard
37330 Graphics are described in section
37331 \begin_inset space ~
37335 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37337 reference "sec:Graphics"
37344 \begin_layout Subsection
37348 \begin_layout Standard
37349 Inserts a URL as described in section
37350 \begin_inset space ~
37354 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37356 reference "subsec:URLs"
37363 \begin_layout Subsection
37367 \begin_layout Standard
37368 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
37369 \begin_inset space ~
37373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37375 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
37382 \begin_layout Subsection
37386 \begin_layout Standard
37387 Inserts a footnote as described in section
37388 \begin_inset space ~
37392 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37394 reference "sec:Footnotes"
37401 \begin_layout Subsection
37405 \begin_layout Standard
37406 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
37407 \begin_inset space ~
37411 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37413 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
37420 \begin_layout Subsection
37424 \begin_layout Standard
37425 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
37426 title or caption of a float.
37427 Inserts a short title as described in section
37428 \begin_inset space ~
37432 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37434 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
37441 \begin_layout Subsection
37446 \begin_layout Standard
37447 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
37448 Code box as described in section
37449 \begin_inset space ~
37453 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37455 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
37462 \begin_layout Subsection
37464 \begin_inset Index idx
37467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37476 \begin_layout Standard
37477 Inserts a program listings box.
37478 Program listings are explained in the chapter
37480 Program Code Listings
37485 \begin_inset space ~
37493 \begin_layout Subsection
37497 \begin_layout Standard
37498 Inserts the actual date.
37499 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
37503 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
37511 \begin_inset space ~
37519 \begin_layout Subsection
37523 \begin_layout Standard
37524 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
37525 \begin_inset space ~
37529 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37531 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37538 \begin_layout Section
37540 \begin_inset Index idx
37543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37552 \begin_layout Standard
37553 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
37554 \begin_inset space ~
37557 of the current document.
37558 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
37561 \begin_layout Subsection
37565 \begin_layout Standard
37566 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
37567 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
37568 to jump, for example, between section
37569 \begin_inset space ~
37573 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37574 \begin_inset space ~
37577 2.5 and use the submenu
37580 \begin_inset space ~
37584 \begin_inset space ~
37591 \begin_inset space ~
37597 \begin_inset space ~
37601 \begin_inset space ~
37607 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37611 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37617 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37620 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37623 \begin_layout Standard
37624 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37628 \begin_inset space ~
37633 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37636 \begin_inset space ~
37641 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37644 \begin_layout Subsection
37645 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37648 \begin_layout Standard
37649 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37653 \begin_layout Subsection
37657 \begin_layout Standard
37658 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37659 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37660 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37664 \begin_inset space ~
37668 \begin_inset space ~
37676 \begin_layout Subsection
37680 \begin_layout Standard
37681 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37684 The \SpecialChar LyX
37685 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
37687 \begin_inset space ~
37695 \begin_inset space ~
37700 manual for a detailed description.
37703 \begin_layout Section
37705 \begin_inset Index idx
37708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37717 \begin_layout Subsection
37721 \begin_layout Standard
37722 Change Tracking is described in section
37723 \begin_inset space ~
37727 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37729 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37736 \begin_layout Subsection
37741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37751 \begin_layout Standard
37752 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
37753 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
37754 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37756 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37757 to the clipboard or update the view.
37758 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37762 \begin_layout Subsection
37763 Start Appendix Here
37766 \begin_layout Standard
37767 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37768 as described in section
37769 \begin_inset space ~
37773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37775 reference "sec:Appendices"
37782 \begin_layout Subsection
37784 \begin_inset space ~
37790 \begin_layout Standard
37791 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37792 default output format for the document (menu
37794 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37795 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37796 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37798 \begin_inset space ~
37802 \begin_inset space ~
37808 \begin_inset space ~
37812 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37814 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37818 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
37821 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37822 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37824 \begin_inset space ~
37827 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37829 \begin_inset space ~
37832 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37834 \begin_inset space ~
37838 \begin_inset space ~
37844 \begin_inset space ~
37848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37850 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37854 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37855 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37857 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37858 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37860 \begin_inset space ~
37863 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37865 \begin_inset space ~
37868 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37872 \begin_inset space ~
37876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37878 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37883 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37884 when it is first configured.
37885 The default output format is
37888 \begin_inset space ~
37896 \begin_layout Subsection
37897 View (Other Formats)
37900 \begin_layout Standard
37901 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37902 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37903 actual document with an external program.
37904 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37905 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37906 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
37908 All possible formats are listed in section
37909 \begin_inset space ~
37913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37915 reference "subsec:Export"
37920 You should at least see the menu entry
37925 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37927 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37929 \begin_inset space ~
37933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37935 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37940 \begin_inset Index idx
37943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37944 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37953 \begin_layout Standard
37954 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37955 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37957 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37958 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37960 \begin_inset space ~
37963 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37965 \begin_inset space ~
37968 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37972 \begin_inset space ~
37976 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37978 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37983 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37984 when it is first configured.
37987 \begin_layout Subsection
37989 \begin_inset space ~
37995 \begin_layout Standard
37996 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37997 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
38000 \begin_layout Subsection
38001 Update (Other Formats)
38004 \begin_layout Standard
38005 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
38006 your document without opening a new viewer window.
38009 \begin_layout Subsection
38010 View Master Document
38013 \begin_layout Standard
38014 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
38016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38030 \begin_inset space ~
38035 manual for more information on this topic).
38036 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
38037 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
38041 \begin_inset space ~
38045 \begin_inset space ~
38050 generates the output of the whole book, while
38054 will just output the chapter alone.
38057 \begin_layout Standard
38058 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
38059 in the document settings (menu
38061 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38062 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38063 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
38065 \begin_inset space ~
38069 \begin_inset space ~
38075 \begin_inset space ~
38079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38081 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
38085 ) or in the preferences (menu
38087 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38088 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38090 \begin_inset space ~
38093 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
38095 \begin_inset space ~
38098 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
38100 \begin_inset space ~
38104 \begin_inset space ~
38110 \begin_inset space ~
38114 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38116 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38123 \begin_layout Subsection
38124 Update Master Document
38127 \begin_layout Standard
38128 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
38130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38144 \begin_inset space ~
38149 manual for more information on this topic).
38150 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
38151 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
38154 \begin_layout Standard
38155 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
38156 in the document settings (menu
38158 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38159 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38160 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
38162 \begin_inset space ~
38166 \begin_inset space ~
38172 \begin_inset space ~
38176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38178 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
38182 ) or in the preferences (menu
38184 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38185 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38187 \begin_inset space ~
38190 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
38192 \begin_inset space ~
38195 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
38197 \begin_inset space ~
38201 \begin_inset space ~
38207 \begin_inset space ~
38211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38213 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38220 \begin_layout Subsection
38224 \begin_layout Standard
38225 Un/compresses the current document.
38228 \begin_layout Subsection
38232 \begin_layout Standard
38233 The document settings are described in appendix
38234 \begin_inset space ~
38238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38240 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
38247 \begin_layout Section
38249 \begin_inset Index idx
38252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38261 \begin_layout Subsection
38265 \begin_layout Standard
38266 Spell checking is explained in section
38267 \begin_inset space ~
38271 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38273 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
38280 \begin_layout Subsection
38284 \begin_layout Standard
38285 The thesaurus is described in section
38286 \begin_inset space ~
38290 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38292 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
38299 \begin_layout Subsection
38301 \begin_inset Index idx
38304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38311 \begin_inset Index idx
38314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38323 \begin_layout Standard
38324 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
38325 the highlighted document part.
38328 \begin_layout Subsection
38333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38341 \begin_inset Index idx
38344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38345 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
38354 \begin_layout Standard
38355 Generates with the help of the program
38357 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
38360 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
38361 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
38362 This feature is not available on Windows.
38365 \begin_layout Subsection
38370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38378 \begin_inset Index idx
38381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38391 \begin_layout Standard
38392 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38397 \begin_inset space ~
38402 to see the full filename paths.
38405 \begin_layout Subsection
38407 \begin_inset Index idx
38410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38419 \begin_layout Standard
38420 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
38421 files as described in section
38422 \begin_inset space ~
38426 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38428 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38435 \begin_layout Subsection
38437 \begin_inset Index idx
38440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38453 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38471 \begin_inset Index idx
38474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38475 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38484 \begin_layout Standard
38485 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
38486 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
38487 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38488 -packages and programs it needs; see
38490 \begin_inset space ~
38494 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38496 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38503 \begin_layout Subsection
38507 \begin_layout Standard
38512 dialog as described in detail in appendix
38513 \begin_inset space ~
38517 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38519 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
38526 \begin_layout Section
38528 \begin_inset Index idx
38531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38540 \begin_layout Standard
38541 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
38542 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
38544 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
38548 \begin_layout Standard
38553 \begin_inset space ~
38558 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
38559 -document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38560 -packages and classes found
38561 by \SpecialChar LyX
38563 \begin_inset space ~
38567 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38569 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
38576 \begin_layout Standard
38580 \begin_inset space ~
38587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38596 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
38601 \begin_layout Section
38603 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38605 name "sec:Toolbars"
38612 \begin_layout Standard
38613 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38614 \begin_inset space ~
38618 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38620 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
38627 \begin_layout Standard
38628 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38629 This is described in the
38631 Additional Features
38636 \begin_layout Subsection
38638 \begin_inset Index idx
38641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38650 \begin_layout Standard
38651 \begin_inset Graphics
38652 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38660 \begin_layout Standard
38661 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38667 \begin_layout Standard
38668 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38685 \begin_inset Note Note
38688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38689 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38694 manual for more information.
38702 \begin_layout Standard
38703 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38709 \begin_layout Standard
38710 \begin_inset Tabular
38711 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38712 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38713 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38714 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38720 \begin_inset Graphics
38721 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38735 pull-down box for the environments
38748 \begin_layout Standard
38749 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38755 \begin_layout Standard
38757 \begin_inset Tabular
38758 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38759 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38760 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38761 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38762 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38785 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38792 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38815 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38822 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38845 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38852 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38861 arg "dialog-show print"
38869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38875 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38882 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38891 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38905 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38912 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38935 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38942 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38965 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38972 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38995 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39002 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39025 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39032 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39055 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39062 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39071 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
39079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39085 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39087 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39091 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39095 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39104 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39111 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
39119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39125 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39127 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39131 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39135 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39144 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39153 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
39161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39167 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
39168 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
39175 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39196 Emphasize text, function of the
39198 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39200 \begin_inset space ~
39203 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39212 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39233 Set text to noun style, function of the
39235 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39237 \begin_inset space ~
39240 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39249 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39258 arg "textstyle-apply"
39266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39270 Format text using the current settings in the
39272 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39274 \begin_inset space ~
39277 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39286 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39309 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39310 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39312 \begin_inset space ~
39321 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39330 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
39338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39344 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39351 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39358 arg "tabular-insert"
39366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39372 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39379 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39388 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
39396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39400 Toggle outline window on/off,
39402 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
39409 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39418 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
39426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39430 Toggle math toolbar on/off
39436 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39445 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
39453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39457 Toggle table toolbar on/off
39470 \begin_layout Subsection
39472 \begin_inset Index idx
39475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39484 \begin_layout Standard
39485 \begin_inset Graphics
39486 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
39494 \begin_layout Standard
39495 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39501 \begin_layout Standard
39502 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39506 \begin_layout Standard
39507 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39513 \begin_layout Standard
39514 \begin_inset Tabular
39515 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
39516 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39517 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39518 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39519 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39546 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39555 arg "layout Enumerate"
39563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39573 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39582 arg "layout Itemize"
39590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39600 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39627 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39636 arg "layout Description"
39644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39654 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39663 arg "depth-increment"
39671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39677 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39679 \begin_inset space ~
39683 \begin_inset space ~
39692 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39701 arg "depth-decrement"
39709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39715 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39717 \begin_inset space ~
39721 \begin_inset space ~
39730 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39739 arg "float-insert figure"
39747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39753 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39754 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39761 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39770 arg "float-insert table"
39778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39784 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39785 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39792 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39815 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39822 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39831 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39845 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39852 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39861 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39875 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39882 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39905 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39907 \begin_inset space ~
39916 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39925 arg "nomencl-insert"
39933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39939 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39941 \begin_inset space ~
39950 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39959 arg "footnote-insert"
39967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39973 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39980 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39989 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40003 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40005 \begin_inset space ~
40014 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40037 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40038 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
40043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40051 \begin_inset space ~
40060 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40069 arg "box-insert Frameless"
40077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40083 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40090 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40113 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40120 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40143 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40160 \begin_inset space ~
40169 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40178 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
40186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40192 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40193 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
40200 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40209 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
40217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40223 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40224 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40226 \begin_inset space ~
40235 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40244 arg "dialog-show character"
40252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40258 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40260 \begin_inset space ~
40263 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
40270 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40279 arg "layout-paragraph"
40287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40293 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40295 \begin_inset space ~
40304 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40313 arg "thesaurus-entry"
40321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40327 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40341 \begin_layout Subsection
40342 View/Update Toolbar
40343 \begin_inset Index idx
40346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40347 Toolbar ! View / Update
40355 \begin_layout Standard
40356 \begin_inset Graphics
40357 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
40364 \begin_layout Standard
40365 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40371 \begin_layout Standard
40372 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40376 \begin_layout Standard
40377 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40383 \begin_layout Standard
40384 \begin_inset Tabular
40385 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
40386 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40387 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40388 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40389 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40412 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40419 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40428 arg "buffer-update"
40436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40442 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40449 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40458 arg "master-buffer-view"
40466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40472 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40474 \begin_inset space ~
40483 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40492 arg "master-buffer-update"
40500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40506 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40508 \begin_inset space ~
40512 \begin_inset space ~
40521 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40530 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
40538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40544 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40545 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40546 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40547 Synchronize with Output
40553 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40558 \begin_inset Graphics
40559 filename ../images/view-others.png
40561 groupId toolbarbuttons
40572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40578 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40579 View (Other Formats)
40585 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40590 \begin_inset Graphics
40591 filename ../images/update-others.png
40593 groupId toolbarbuttons
40602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40608 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40609 Update (Other Formats)
40622 \begin_layout Standard
40623 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40627 \begin_layout Subsection
40631 \begin_layout Standard
40632 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40633 \begin_inset space ~
40637 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40639 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40643 , the table toolbar
40644 \begin_inset Index idx
40647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40656 \begin_inset space ~
40661 manual and the math macro toolbar
40662 \begin_inset Index idx
40665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40678 \begin_layout Chapter
40679 The Document Settings
40680 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40682 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40687 \begin_inset Index idx
40690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40691 Document ! Settings
40699 \begin_layout Standard
40703 \begin_inset space ~
40708 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40709 is called with the menu
40711 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40715 You can save your document settings as default with the
40717 Save as Document Defaults
40719 button in any dialog.
40720 This will create a template named
40724 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
40725 when you create a new document without
40729 \begin_layout Standard
40734 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40735 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40738 \begin_layout Standard
40739 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40740 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40741 to find the one you are looking for.
40742 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40743 the submenus of the dialog.
40745 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40749 \begin_inset space \space{}
40753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40760 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40761 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40762 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40765 \begin_layout Section
40769 \begin_layout Standard
40770 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40772 Document classes are described in section
40773 \begin_inset space ~
40777 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40779 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40787 \begin_layout Standard
40791 \begin_inset space ~
40796 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
40801 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
40802 as a layout for a document class.
40803 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40805 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40814 \begin_layout Standard
40815 Some classes use special class options by default.
40816 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40820 and you can decide to use them or not.
40821 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40822 recommended you leave them untouched.
40827 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40828 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40833 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40835 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40841 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40842 \begin_inset Newline newline
40847 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40850 \begin_inset Newline newline
40853 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40854 distribution, see section
40859 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40861 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40873 \begin_layout Standard
40878 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40879 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
40880 in the background if the child document
40881 is opened without its master.
40882 This way child documents are always compilable.
40883 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40890 \begin_inset space ~
40898 \begin_layout Standard
40899 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40910 \begin_inset Index idx
40913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40915 -packages ! prettyref
40921 \begin_inset Index idx
40924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40926 -packages ! refstyle
40931 for cross-references, see section
40932 \begin_inset space ~
40936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40938 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40945 \begin_layout Section
40949 \begin_layout Standard
40950 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40951 Please refer to the section
40954 \begin_inset space ~
40962 \begin_inset space ~
40967 manual for details.
40970 \begin_layout Section
40974 \begin_layout Standard
40975 Modules are explained in section
40976 \begin_inset space ~
40980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40982 reference "subsec:Modules"
40989 \begin_layout Section
40993 \begin_layout Standard
40995 \begin_inset space ~
40999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41001 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
41008 \begin_layout Section
41012 \begin_layout Standard
41013 The document font settings are described in section
41014 \begin_inset space ~
41018 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41020 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
41027 \begin_layout Section
41031 \begin_layout Standard
41032 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
41044 \begin_inset space ~
41049 and whether it should be a
41052 \begin_inset space ~
41057 can also be specified here.
41060 \begin_layout Standard
41061 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
41062 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
41063 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
41065 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
41068 \begin_layout Standard
41071 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
41074 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
41075 justifies the text on screen.
41076 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
41080 \begin_layout Section
41084 \begin_layout Standard
41085 This dialog is described in sections
41086 \begin_inset space ~
41090 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41092 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
41097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41099 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
41106 \begin_layout Section
41110 \begin_layout Standard
41111 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
41112 \begin_inset space ~
41116 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41118 reference "subsec:Margins"
41125 \begin_layout Section
41127 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41129 name "sec:Language-encodings"
41134 \begin_inset Index idx
41137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41138 Language ! Encoding
41146 \begin_layout Standard
41147 The document language and quote styles are set here.
41148 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
41149 (the \SpecialChar LyX
41151 is always encoded in utf8).
41152 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
41153 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
41154 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
41155 -command is not known for
41156 a particular character).
41159 \begin_layout Standard
41160 If you use the option
41165 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
41166 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
41167 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41169 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
41170 exactly one encoding.
41171 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
41174 \begin_layout Standard
41176 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
41177 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
41178 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
41179 installation supports Unicode), choose
41180 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
41181 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
41182 is quite incomplete, so
41183 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
41188 (when \SpecialChar LyX
41189 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
41190 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
41191 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
41192 -commands is not used, because all
41193 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
41194 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41195 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41196 , two new alternative engines
41197 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
41199 Both engines support Unicode natively.
41201 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
41204 \begin_inset space ~
41211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41223 \begin_inset space ~
41230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41242 \begin_inset space ~
41245 (Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41249 \begin_inset space ~
41253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41255 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
41260 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
41264 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
41267 \begin_layout Standard
41271 \begin_inset space ~
41276 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41277 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
41279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41287 The possible settings are:
41290 \begin_layout Description
41291 Default uses the language package that is selected in
41293 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41294 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41298 \begin_inset space ~
41302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41304 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
41311 \begin_layout Description
41312 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
41313 format you will use.
41314 In many cases this will be
41319 \begin_inset Index idx
41322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41330 If the newer package
41335 \begin_inset Index idx
41338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41340 -packages ! polyglossia
41345 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41346 or LuaTeX and non-\SpecialChar TeX
41348 this package will be used instead of
41355 \begin_layout Description
41357 \begin_inset space ~
41368 would be more appropriate.
41371 \begin_layout Description
41372 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
41373 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
41377 (for German texts), type in
41380 \begin_inset Newline newline
41385 usepackage{ngerman}
41388 \begin_layout Description
41389 None will not use a language package.
41390 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
41393 \begin_layout Standard
41394 Here is a list with the important encodings:
41397 \begin_layout Description
41399 \begin_inset space ~
41403 \begin_inset space ~
41407 \begin_inset space ~
41414 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41420 \begin_inset Index idx
41423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41425 -packages ! inputenc
41431 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
41432 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
41433 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
41437 \begin_layout Description
41438 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
41440 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
41441 commands, which may result in a big
41442 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
41443 -commands are needed.
41446 \begin_layout Description
41448 \begin_inset space ~
41452 \begin_inset space ~
41455 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
41458 \begin_layout Description
41460 \begin_inset space ~
41464 \begin_inset space ~
41467 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
41470 \begin_layout Description
41472 \begin_inset space ~
41475 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
41478 \begin_layout Description
41480 \begin_inset space ~
41484 \begin_inset space ~
41487 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
41488 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
41491 \begin_layout Description
41493 \begin_inset space ~
41497 \begin_inset space ~
41500 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
41504 \begin_layout Description
41506 \begin_inset space ~
41510 \begin_inset space ~
41513 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
41514 ISO-8859-13 encoding
41517 \begin_layout Description
41519 \begin_inset space ~
41523 \begin_inset space ~
41527 \begin_inset space ~
41530 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
41531 \begin_inset space ~
41537 \begin_layout Description
41539 \begin_inset space ~
41543 \begin_inset space ~
41547 \begin_inset space ~
41550 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
41551 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
41554 \begin_layout Description
41556 \begin_inset space ~
41560 \begin_inset space ~
41563 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
41564 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
41565 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41566 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
41567 \begin_inset space ~
41571 \begin_inset space ~
41577 \begin_layout Description
41579 \begin_inset space ~
41583 \begin_inset space ~
41586 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
41587 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
41588 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41590 should try to use the encoding Unicode
41591 \begin_inset space ~
41595 \begin_inset space ~
41601 \begin_layout Description
41603 \begin_inset space ~
41607 \begin_inset space ~
41610 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
41613 \begin_layout Description
41615 \begin_inset space ~
41619 \begin_inset space ~
41622 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
41625 \begin_layout Description
41627 \begin_inset space ~
41631 \begin_inset space ~
41634 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41637 \begin_layout Description
41639 \begin_inset space ~
41642 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41645 \begin_layout Description
41647 \begin_inset space ~
41650 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41653 \begin_layout Description
41655 \begin_inset space ~
41659 \begin_inset space ~
41662 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41665 \begin_layout Description
41667 \begin_inset space ~
41671 \begin_inset space ~
41677 \begin_layout Description
41679 \begin_inset space ~
41683 \begin_inset space ~
41686 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41689 \begin_layout Description
41691 \begin_inset space ~
41695 \begin_inset space ~
41701 \begin_layout Description
41703 \begin_inset space ~
41707 \begin_inset space ~
41710 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41716 \begin_inset Index idx
41719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41726 , when using this, set the document language to
41731 \begin_layout Description
41733 \begin_inset space ~
41737 \begin_inset space ~
41740 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41745 , when using this, set the document language to
41748 \begin_inset space ~
41754 \begin_layout Description
41756 \begin_inset space ~
41760 \begin_inset space ~
41763 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41769 \begin_inset Index idx
41772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41774 -packages ! japanese
41779 , when using this, set the document language to
41784 \begin_layout Description
41786 \begin_inset space ~
41790 \begin_inset space ~
41793 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41798 , when using this, set the document language to
41803 \begin_layout Description
41805 \begin_inset space ~
41809 \begin_inset space ~
41812 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41817 , when using this, set the document language to
41822 \begin_layout Description
41824 \begin_inset space ~
41827 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41830 \begin_layout Description
41832 \begin_inset space ~
41836 \begin_inset space ~
41840 \begin_inset space ~
41843 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41846 \begin_layout Description
41848 \begin_inset space ~
41852 \begin_inset space ~
41856 \begin_inset space ~
41859 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41860 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41861 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41864 \begin_layout Description
41866 \begin_inset space ~
41870 \begin_inset space ~
41876 \begin_layout Description
41878 \begin_inset space ~
41882 \begin_inset space ~
41885 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41886 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41889 \begin_layout Description
41891 \begin_inset space ~
41895 \begin_inset space ~
41898 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41904 \begin_inset Index idx
41907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41914 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41917 \begin_layout Description
41919 \begin_inset space ~
41922 (Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41924 \begin_inset space ~
41927 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41934 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41937 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41944 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41945 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41947 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41950 \begin_layout Description
41952 \begin_inset space ~
41956 \begin_inset space ~
41959 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41965 \begin_inset Index idx
41968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41975 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41978 \begin_layout Description
41980 \begin_inset space ~
41983 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41989 \begin_inset Index idx
41992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41994 -packages ! inputenc
42000 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
42004 \begin_layout Description
42006 \begin_inset space ~
42010 \begin_inset space ~
42014 \begin_inset space ~
42017 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
42018 \begin_inset space ~
42024 \begin_layout Description
42026 \begin_inset space ~
42030 \begin_inset space ~
42034 \begin_inset space ~
42037 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
42038 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
42039 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
42043 \begin_layout Description
42045 \begin_inset space ~
42049 \begin_inset space ~
42053 \begin_inset space ~
42056 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
42057 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
42060 \begin_layout Section
42062 \begin_inset Index idx
42065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42072 \begin_inset Index idx
42075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42082 \begin_inset Index idx
42085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42086 Color ! Shaded boxes
42092 \begin_inset Index idx
42095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42096 Color ! Greyed-out notes
42104 \begin_layout Standard
42105 Here you can alter the font color for the
42109 (default: black), for
42112 \begin_inset space ~
42117 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
42121 (default: white) and for
42124 \begin_inset space ~
42134 sets the color back to the default.
42137 \begin_layout Standard
42138 Clicking any button showing
42146 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
42147 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
42148 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
42149 later more quickly.
42152 \begin_layout Standard
42153 Note, if you change the
42156 \begin_inset space ~
42161 font color and use the option
42164 \begin_inset space ~
42169 in the document settings under
42172 \begin_inset space ~
42177 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
42178 \begin_inset space ~
42182 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42184 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
42191 \begin_layout Standard
42192 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
42198 \begin_layout Standard
42202 \begin_inset space ~
42211 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
42214 \begin_inset space ~
42217 Code after a forced page break:
42220 \begin_layout Itemize
42221 For the page color:
42222 \begin_inset Newline newline
42229 pagecolor{color name}
42232 \begin_layout Itemize
42233 For the text color:
42234 \begin_inset Newline newline
42244 \begin_layout Standard
42245 You are restricted to one of
42281 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
42288 \begin_inset space ~
42294 \begin_inset Newline newline
42297 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
42298 names to refer to them:
42301 \begin_layout Itemize
42307 \begin_inset Newline newline
42312 page_backgroundcolor
42315 \begin_layout Itemize
42319 \begin_inset space ~
42325 \begin_inset Newline newline
42333 \begin_layout Itemize
42337 \begin_inset space ~
42343 \begin_inset Newline newline
42351 \begin_layout Itemize
42355 \begin_inset space ~
42361 \begin_inset Newline newline
42369 \begin_layout Standard
42370 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
42373 \begin_inset space ~
42381 \begin_inset space ~
42389 \begin_layout Section
42393 \begin_layout Standard
42394 Here you can adjust the
42398 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
42402 as described in section
42403 \begin_inset space ~
42407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42409 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
42416 \begin_layout Section
42420 \begin_layout Standard
42421 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42427 \begin_inset Index idx
42430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42442 \begin_inset Index idx
42445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42447 -packages ! jurabib
42455 Sectioned bibliography
42457 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42463 \begin_inset Index idx
42466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42468 -packages ! bibtopic
42473 and you can select a
42477 for the generation of the bibliography.
42478 For a further description see section
42479 \begin_inset space ~
42483 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42485 reference "sec:Bibliography"
42492 \begin_layout Section
42496 \begin_layout Standard
42497 Here you can define the
42501 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
42503 \begin_inset space ~
42507 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42509 reference "sec:Index"
42516 \begin_layout Section
42520 \begin_layout Standard
42521 The PDF properties are explained in section
42522 \begin_inset space ~
42526 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42528 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
42535 \begin_layout Section
42539 \begin_layout Standard
42540 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
42541 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42547 \begin_inset Index idx
42550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42552 -packages ! amsmath
42562 \begin_inset Index idx
42565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42567 -packages ! amssymb
42577 \begin_inset Index idx
42580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42592 \begin_inset Index idx
42595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42607 \begin_inset Index idx
42610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42612 -packages ! mathdots
42622 \begin_inset Index idx
42625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42627 -packages ! mathtools
42637 \begin_inset Index idx
42640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42652 \begin_inset Index idx
42655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42657 -packages ! stackrel
42667 \begin_inset Index idx
42670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42672 -packages ! stmaryrd
42682 \begin_inset Index idx
42685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42687 -packages ! undertilde
42692 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
42695 \begin_layout Description
42696 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42697 -errors in formulas,
42698 ensure that you have this enabled.
42701 \begin_layout Description
42702 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
42703 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42704 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
42708 \begin_layout Description
42709 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
42712 \begin_inset space ~
42724 \begin_layout Description
42725 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
42728 \begin_inset space ~
42740 \begin_layout Description
42741 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
42752 \begin_layout Description
42753 mathtools is used for the math commands
42789 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
42796 \begin_layout Description
42797 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
42799 Chemical Symbols and Equations
42808 \begin_layout Description
42809 stackrel is used for the math command
42826 \begin_layout Description
42827 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
42830 \begin_layout Description
42831 undertilde is used for the math command
42839 Accents for one Character
42848 \begin_layout Section
42852 \begin_layout Standard
42853 The float placement options are described in the section
42856 \begin_inset space ~
42864 \begin_inset space ~
42872 \begin_layout Section
42876 \begin_layout Standard
42877 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42879 Program Code Listings
42884 \begin_inset space ~
42892 \begin_layout Section
42896 \begin_layout Standard
42897 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42905 set to be used and set the
42910 The itemize environment is described in section
42911 \begin_inset space ~
42915 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42917 reference "sec:Itemize"
42924 \begin_layout Standard
42925 You can furthermore specify a
42928 \begin_inset space ~
42933 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42934 command of the desired character.
42935 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42942 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42944 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42948 \begin_inset space \space{}
42952 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42962 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42963 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42966 \begin_layout Standard
42967 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42975 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42976 -packages in the preamble (menu
42979 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42980 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42983 \begin_inset space ~
42989 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42993 usepackage{textcomp}
42996 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
43000 usepackage{amssymb}
43010 \begin_layout Section
43014 \begin_layout Standard
43015 Branches are described in section
43016 \begin_inset space ~
43020 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43022 reference "sec:Branches"
43029 \begin_layout Section
43031 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43033 name "sec:Doc-Output"
43040 \begin_layout Standard
43041 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
43044 \begin_layout Description
43046 \begin_inset space ~
43050 \begin_inset space ~
43053 Format: The format that is used when you enter
43054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43073 View Master Document
43074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43081 Update Master Document
43082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43089 menu or the toolbar.
43090 The default is set in
43092 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43093 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43095 \begin_inset space ~
43098 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43102 \begin_inset space ~
43106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43108 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43115 \begin_layout Description
43117 \begin_inset space ~
43121 \begin_inset space ~
43124 Output settings for the menu
43126 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43128 \begin_inset space ~
43134 For a detailed description see section
43136 Reverse DVI/PDF search
43141 \begin_inset space ~
43149 \begin_layout Description
43151 \begin_inset space ~
43155 \begin_inset space ~
43158 Options offers settings for the export format
43164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43177 \begin_inset space ~
43182 will assure that the output follows exactly version
43183 \begin_inset space ~
43186 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
43190 \begin_inset space ~
43195 settings are described in detail in section
43197 Math Output in XHTML
43202 \begin_inset space ~
43211 \begin_inset space ~
43215 \begin_inset space ~
43220 is used for the size of equations in the output.
43223 \begin_layout Section
43228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43238 \begin_layout Standard
43239 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
43241 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
43243 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43245 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
43249 \begin_layout Standard
43250 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43251 -syntax is given in section
43252 \begin_inset space ~
43256 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43258 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
43265 \begin_layout Chapter
43271 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43273 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
43278 \begin_inset Index idx
43281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43290 \begin_layout Standard
43291 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
43293 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43297 It has the following submenus.
43300 \begin_layout Section
43304 \begin_layout Subsection
43308 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43309 User Interface File
43310 \begin_inset Index idx
43313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43314 Customization ! of toolbars
43320 \begin_inset Index idx
43323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43324 Customization ! of menus
43332 \begin_layout Standard
43333 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
43334 interface (ui) file.
43335 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
43343 \begin_layout Description
43348 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
43351 \begin_layout Description
43358 the menu entries in popup context menus
43361 \begin_layout Description
43366 specifies the toolbar buttons
43369 \begin_layout Standard
43370 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
43371 and edit the entries.
43374 \begin_layout Standard
43375 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
43387 entries must be finished with an explicit
43412 and in the case of the
43413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43425 The syntax for the entries is:
43428 \begin_layout Standard
43429 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43458 \begin_layout Standard
43460 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43463 All the \SpecialChar LyX
43464 -functions are listed in the menu
43466 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
43471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43479 \begin_inset space ~
43487 \begin_layout Standard
43488 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
43494 \begin_layout Standard
43495 For example, assuming you use the menu
43497 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43500 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
43504 \begin_layout Standard
43505 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43523 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43529 \begin_layout Standard
43531 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43546 to have the sixth bookmark.
43549 \begin_layout Standard
43553 \begin_inset space ~
43558 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
43559 's toolbar buttons.
43560 The currently available icon sets are compared in
43561 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43564 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
43571 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43575 \begin_layout Standard
43578 Enable tool tips in main work area
43580 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
43584 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43588 \begin_layout Standard
43593 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
43594 should display in the menu
43596 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43598 \begin_inset space ~
43606 \begin_layout Subsection
43610 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43614 \begin_layout Standard
43617 Restore window layouts and geometries
43620 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
43621 the last \SpecialChar LyX
43625 \begin_layout Standard
43628 Restore cursor positions
43630 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
43634 \begin_layout Standard
43637 Load opened files from last session
43639 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
43643 \begin_layout Standard
43646 Clear all session information
43648 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
43649 sessions (cursor positions, names
43650 of last opened documents, etc.).
43653 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43655 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43657 name "subsec:Backup documents"
43662 \begin_inset Index idx
43665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43674 \begin_layout Standard
43677 Backup original documents when saving
43679 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
43680 it was saved the last time.
43681 It is stored in the
43684 \begin_inset space ~
43690 \begin_inset space ~
43694 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43696 reference "sec:Paths"
43700 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
43703 \begin_inset space ~
43709 The backup file has the file extension
43710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43724 \begin_layout Standard
43727 Backup documents, every
43729 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
43732 \begin_layout Standard
43735 Save documents compressed by default
43737 always saves files in a compressed format.
43740 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43741 Windows & work area
43744 \begin_layout Standard
43747 Open documents in tabs
43749 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
43753 \begin_layout Standard
43758 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
43763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43765 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43771 reference "sec:Paths"
43775 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
43782 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
43783 documents will be opened in the same running instance
43784 of \SpecialChar LyX
43786 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
43787 instance is created for each file.
43790 \begin_layout Standard
43793 Single close-tab button
43795 is checked, there will only be one close button (
43798 \begin_inset Graphics
43799 filename ../images/closetab.png
43806 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
43807 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
43810 \begin_layout Standard
43811 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43819 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
43820 before the change takes effect.
43828 \begin_layout Standard
43833 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
43835 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
43837 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43841 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
43842 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
43843 and only want to close the view in once instance.
43846 \begin_layout Subsection
43848 \begin_inset Index idx
43851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43858 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43860 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
43867 \begin_layout Standard
43868 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
43872 \begin_layout Standard
43873 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43881 This section only deals with the fonts
43885 the \SpecialChar LyX
43887 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
43890 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43891 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43902 \begin_layout Standard
43903 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
43920 (depends on the system) as its
43923 \begin_inset space ~
43939 \begin_layout Standard
43940 You can change the font size with the
43947 \begin_layout Standard
43952 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43954 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43957 points have the size of 1
43958 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43962 \begin_inset space ~
43966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43968 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
43973 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
43974 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43978 The sizes are explained in detail in section
43979 \begin_inset space ~
43983 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43985 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
43992 \begin_layout Standard
43995 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
43997 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
43998 needs to redraw the screen less often.
43999 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
44000 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
44001 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
44003 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
44004 \begin_inset space ~
44010 \begin_layout Subsection
44012 \begin_inset Index idx
44015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44016 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
44023 \begin_inset Index idx
44026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44035 \begin_layout Standard
44036 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
44037 by choosing an item in the
44038 list and selecting the
44045 \begin_layout Standard
44046 By checking the option
44050 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
44053 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
44054 \begin_inset space ~
44058 \begin_inset space ~
44063 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
44066 \begin_layout Subsection
44068 \begin_inset Index idx
44071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44080 \begin_layout Standard
44081 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
44085 \begin_layout Standard
44090 enables previewing snippets of your document.
44091 This feature is described in section
44092 \begin_inset space ~
44096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44098 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
44105 \begin_layout Standard
44106 Checking the option
44109 \begin_inset space ~
44113 \begin_inset space ~
44117 \begin_inset space ~
44122 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
44125 \begin_layout Section
44127 \begin_inset Index idx
44130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44139 \begin_layout Subsection
44143 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44147 \begin_layout Standard
44150 Cursor follows scrollbar
44152 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
44156 \begin_layout Standard
44157 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
44158 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
44159 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
44162 \begin_layout Standard
44165 Scroll below end of document
44167 is self-explanatory.
44170 \begin_layout Standard
44171 In \SpecialChar LyX
44172 one can jump from word to word by pressing
44179 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
44181 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
44182 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
44185 \begin_layout Standard
44188 Sort environments alphabetically
44190 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
44193 \begin_layout Standard
44196 Group environments by their category
44198 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
44201 \begin_layout Standard
44206 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
44217 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44221 \begin_layout Standard
44222 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
44227 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
44228 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
44232 \begin_layout Subsection
44234 \begin_inset Index idx
44237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44244 \begin_inset Index idx
44247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44248 Settings ! Shortcuts
44256 \begin_layout Standard
44261 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
44262 -function to a key.
44263 Several binding files are available, among them:
44266 \begin_layout Description
44267 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
44270 \begin_layout Description
44271 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
44283 \begin_layout Description
44284 mac.bind a set of bindings for
44287 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44295 \begin_layout Standard
44296 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
44301 , and binding files for special languages.
44302 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
44303 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44307 \begin_inset space \space{}
44311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44319 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
44320 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
44321 will try to use the appropriate binding
44325 \begin_layout Standard
44326 Some binding files, like
44330 , only have a limited scope.
44331 When looking at the end of the file
44335 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
44338 \begin_layout Standard
44342 \begin_inset space ~
44346 \begin_inset space ~
44351 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
44352 in the selected key binding file.
44355 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44357 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44359 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
44364 \begin_inset Index idx
44367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44368 Key Bindings ! Editing
44376 \begin_layout Standard
44377 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
44378 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
44379 -functions and the bound shortcuts.
44380 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
44383 Show key-bindings containing
44386 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
44387 Insert there for example as keyword
44388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44395 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
44396 functions that contain
44397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44405 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
44406 All \SpecialChar LyX
44407 -functions are also listed in the file
44412 that you will find in the
44419 \begin_layout Standard
44420 For example, to add the shortcut
44428 , select the function and press the
44433 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
44434 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
44437 \begin_layout Standard
44438 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
44439 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
44441 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
44442 function names as a semicolon separated list.
44444 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
44449 \begin_layout Standard
44450 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
44453 \begin_layout Standard
44454 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
44456 The syntax of the entries is:
44459 \begin_layout Standard
44465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44484 \begin_layout Subsection
44486 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44488 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
44493 \begin_inset Index idx
44496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44503 \begin_inset Index idx
44506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44507 Settings ! Keyboard Map
44515 \begin_layout Standard
44516 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
44517 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
44518 provides keyboard maps.
44519 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
44520 is a Romanian one, you can enable
44523 \begin_inset space ~
44527 \begin_inset space ~
44532 and select the keyboard map file named
44539 \begin_layout Standard
44548 keyboard map and, if you use the
44552 bindings, you can select the first and second with
44555 arg "keymap-primary"
44561 arg "keymap-secondary"
44564 respectively or toggle between them with
44567 arg "keymap-toggle"
44573 \begin_layout Standard
44574 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44582 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
44591 \begin_layout Standard
44592 You can also specify the mouse
44594 Wheel scrolling speed
44597 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
44601 \begin_layout Standard
44609 \begin_inset space ~
44613 \begin_inset space ~
44618 you can select a key for zooming.
44619 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
44622 \begin_layout Subsection
44626 \begin_layout Standard
44627 Input completion is described in section
44628 \begin_inset space ~
44632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44634 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
44641 \begin_layout Section
44643 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44650 \begin_inset Index idx
44653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44660 \begin_inset Index idx
44663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44672 \begin_layout Standard
44673 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
44674 are normally determined during
44676 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
44679 \begin_layout Description
44681 \begin_inset space ~
44684 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
44685 's working directory.
44686 It is the default when you
44697 \begin_inset space ~
44705 \begin_layout Description
44707 \begin_inset space ~
44710 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
44712 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44714 \begin_inset space ~
44718 \begin_inset space ~
44726 \begin_layout Description
44728 \begin_inset space ~
44731 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
44737 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44741 \begin_inset Newline newline
44745 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44757 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
44758 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
44766 \begin_layout Description
44768 \begin_inset space ~
44772 \begin_inset Index idx
44775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44781 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
44782 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
44783 \begin_inset space ~
44787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44789 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44797 will be used to save the backups.
44798 \begin_inset Newline newline
44801 Backup files have the ending
44802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44812 \begin_layout Description
44817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44825 \begin_inset space ~
44828 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
44829 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
44831 \begin_inset Newline newline
44838 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44844 You can edit this file with the program
44853 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
44854 in its preferences under
44857 \begin_inset space ~
44863 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
44868 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
44870 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
44871 in your \SpecialChar LyX
44877 and \SpecialChar LyX
44878 need to be running the same time.
44879 \begin_inset Newline newline
44882 The pipe is also used for the
44887 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44893 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44898 \begin_inset Newline newline
44901 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
44902 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
44903 \begin_inset Newline newline
44919 \begin_layout Description
44921 \begin_inset space ~
44924 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
44927 \begin_layout Description
44929 \begin_inset space ~
44932 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
44933 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
44934 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
44937 \begin_layout Description
44939 \begin_inset space ~
44942 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
44948 You only need to specify it if you are using
44952 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44954 For \SpecialChar LyX
44959 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44963 \begin_layout Description
44965 \begin_inset space ~
44968 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44969 When \SpecialChar LyX
44970 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
44971 to find it on the system.
44972 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
44974 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
44976 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44980 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44983 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
44984 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
44987 \begin_layout Description
44989 \begin_inset space ~
44992 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
44993 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
44994 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
44995 code or in the document
44997 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
44999 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
45000 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
45001 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
45002 scanned for the input files.
45003 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
45004 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
45006 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
45007 compilation may fail for some documents.
45010 \begin_layout Section
45014 \begin_layout Standard
45015 Here you can insert your
45024 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
45026 \begin_inset space ~
45030 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45032 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
45036 , to mark changes you make as yours.
45039 \begin_layout Section
45041 \begin_inset Index idx
45044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45045 Language ! Settings
45051 \begin_inset Index idx
45054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45055 Settings ! Language
45063 \begin_layout Subsection
45065 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45067 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
45074 \begin_layout Description
45076 \begin_inset space ~
45080 \begin_inset space ~
45083 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
45085 You can find its actual translation status here:
45086 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45088 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
45095 \begin_layout Description
45097 \begin_inset space ~
45100 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
45101 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
45102 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
45103 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
45104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45120 The most widespread language package is
45125 \begin_inset Index idx
45128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45135 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
45137 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45138 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45139 come with the alternative
45145 \begin_inset Index idx
45148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45150 -packages ! polyglossia
45155 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
45156 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
45162 The available selections are described in section
45163 \begin_inset space ~
45167 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45169 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
45176 \begin_layout Description
45178 \begin_inset space ~
45181 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45182 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
45183 you can here specify the command to start the package.
45184 An example is the start command
45190 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
45192 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
45196 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
45211 selectlanguage{$$lang}
45216 \begin_layout Description
45218 \begin_inset space ~
45226 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
45227 command toggles the package on and off.
45230 \begin_layout Description
45232 \begin_inset space ~
45236 \begin_inset space ~
45239 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
45243 \begin_layout Description
45245 \begin_inset space ~
45249 \begin_inset space ~
45252 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
45256 \begin_layout Description
45258 \begin_inset space ~
45262 \begin_inset space ~
45265 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
45266 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
45267 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
45269 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
45276 \begin_layout Description
45278 \begin_inset space ~
45281 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
45283 When this option is not set, the
45286 \begin_inset space ~
45291 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45293 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
45296 \begin_inset space ~
45304 \begin_layout Description
45306 \begin_inset space ~
45312 \begin_inset space ~
45318 When it is not set, the
45321 \begin_inset space ~
45326 is set to the end of the document.
45329 \begin_layout Description
45331 \begin_inset space ~
45335 \begin_inset space ~
45338 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
45339 language will be underlined in blue.
45342 \begin_layout Description
45344 \begin_inset space ~
45348 \begin_inset space ~
45351 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
45352 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
45355 \begin_layout Description
45357 \begin_inset space ~
45360 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
45361 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
45362 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
45363 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
45366 \begin_layout Subsection
45370 \begin_layout Standard
45371 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
45372 \begin_inset space ~
45376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45378 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
45385 \begin_layout Section
45389 \begin_layout Subsection
45393 \begin_layout Description
45395 \begin_inset space ~
45399 \begin_inset space ~
45402 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
45405 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45406 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
45408 \begin_inset space ~
45414 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
45417 \begin_layout Description
45419 \begin_inset space ~
45423 \begin_inset Index idx
45426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45433 \begin_inset Index idx
45436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45437 Settings ! Date format
45442 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
45443 \begin_inset Newline newline
45447 \begin_inset Flex URL
45450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45452 http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date
45458 \begin_inset Newline newline
45461 For example the format
45462 \begin_inset Newline newline
45466 \begin_inset Newline newline
45469 prints the date as day/month/year.
45472 \begin_layout Description
45474 \begin_inset space ~
45478 \begin_inset space ~
45481 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
45482 is allowed to overwrite on export.
45485 \begin_layout Description
45487 \begin_inset space ~
45490 search Commands that will be used for the menu
45492 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45494 \begin_inset space ~
45500 For a detailed description see section
45502 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45507 \begin_inset space ~
45515 \begin_layout Subsection
45520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45528 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45530 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
45535 \begin_inset Index idx
45538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45539 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
45548 \begin_layout Description
45550 \begin_inset space ~
45557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45565 \begin_inset space ~
45569 \begin_inset space ~
45572 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
45577 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
45598 are used for Cyrillic.
45599 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
45600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45612 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
45614 sets up in the background.
45615 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
45618 \begin_layout Description
45620 \begin_inset space ~
45624 \begin_inset space ~
45627 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
45632 value depends on your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45636 \begin_layout Description
45638 \begin_inset space ~
45642 \begin_inset space ~
45646 \begin_inset space ~
45650 \begin_inset space ~
45653 options They only have an effect when the program
45657 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
45660 \begin_layout Standard
45661 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
45662 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
45663 manuals of the applications.
45666 \begin_layout Description
45668 \begin_inset space ~
45671 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
45672 \begin_inset space ~
45676 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45678 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
45685 \begin_layout Description
45687 \begin_inset space ~
45690 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
45691 \begin_inset space ~
45695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45697 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
45704 \begin_layout Description
45706 \begin_inset space ~
45709 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
45710 \begin_inset space ~
45714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45716 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
45723 \begin_layout Description
45728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45736 \begin_inset space ~
45739 command Command for the program
45741 Check\SpecialChar TeX
45744 that is described in the section
45746 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
45751 Additional Features
45756 \begin_layout Standard
45757 There are additionally the following options:
45760 \begin_layout Description
45762 \begin_inset space ~
45766 \begin_inset space ~
45770 \begin_inset space ~
45774 \begin_inset space ~
45779 \begin_inset space ~
45782 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
45783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45800 to separate folders.
45801 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
45803 \begin_inset Index idx
45806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45813 \begin_inset Index idx
45816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45825 \begin_layout Description
45827 \begin_inset space ~
45831 \begin_inset space ~
45835 \begin_inset space ~
45839 \begin_inset space ~
45843 \begin_inset space ~
45847 \begin_inset space ~
45850 changes Removes all manually set
45856 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45857 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45859 \begin_inset space ~
45864 dialog when changing the document class.
45867 \begin_layout Section
45869 \begin_inset space ~
45873 \begin_inset Index idx
45876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45885 \begin_layout Subsection
45887 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45889 name "subsec:Converters"
45894 \begin_inset Index idx
45897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45906 \begin_layout Standard
45907 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45908 from one format to another.
45909 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45910 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45917 \begin_inset space ~
45922 field and press the
45927 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45931 \begin_inset space ~
45936 drop-down list, modify the
45940 field and press the
45947 \begin_layout Standard
45950 Converter File Cache
45956 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45958 Maximum Age (in days
45961 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45962 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45965 \begin_layout Standard
45966 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45967 definition, is described in the section
45978 \begin_layout Subsection
45980 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45982 name "sec:File-Formats"
45987 \begin_inset Index idx
45990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45997 \begin_inset Index idx
46000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46009 \begin_layout Standard
46010 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
46020 programs that should be used for certain formats.
46023 \begin_layout Standard
46024 You can also define the
46026 Default output format
46028 that is used when you use
46030 View, Update, View Master Document
46034 Update Master Document
46040 menu or the toolbar.
46043 \begin_layout Standard
46044 More about formats and their options is described in the section
46055 \begin_layout Standard
46056 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
46058 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
46059 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
46060 This is done by specifying a
46065 More about this is described in the section
46076 \begin_layout Chapter
46077 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
46079 \begin_inset Index idx
46082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46089 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46091 name "chap:Units-available-in"
46098 \begin_layout Standard
46100 \begin_inset space ~
46104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46106 reference "tab:Units"
46110 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
46111 and used in this documentation.
46114 \begin_layout Standard
46115 \begin_inset Float table
46121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46122 \begin_inset Caption Standard
46124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46125 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46140 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
46146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46148 \begin_inset Tabular
46149 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="2">
46150 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
46151 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
46152 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
46154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46248 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46252 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46276 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46280 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46303 scaled point (65536
46304 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46308 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46332 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46336 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46360 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46364 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
46368 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46396 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46419 % of original image width
46426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46608 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46612 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46633 \begin_layout Chapter
46635 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46637 name "chap:Credits"
46644 \begin_layout Standard
46645 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
46646 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
46649 \begin_layout Itemize
46652 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
46655 \begin_layout Itemize
46661 \begin_layout Itemize
46667 \begin_layout Itemize
46673 \begin_layout Itemize
46679 \begin_layout Itemize
46685 \begin_layout Itemize
46691 \begin_layout Itemize
46697 \begin_layout Itemize
46700 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
46703 \begin_layout Itemize
46709 \begin_layout Itemize
46715 \begin_layout Itemize
46721 \begin_layout Itemize
46727 \begin_layout Itemize
46733 \begin_layout Itemize
46739 \begin_layout Itemize
46745 \begin_layout Itemize
46751 \begin_layout Itemize
46752 The \SpecialChar LyX
46754 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46763 \begin_layout Standard
46764 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46767 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
46774 \begin_layout Bibliography
46775 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46776 LatexCommand bibitem
46782 The \SpecialChar LyX
46784 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46787 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
46792 \begin_inset Newline newline
46796 \begin_inset Flex URL
46799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46801 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
46809 \begin_layout Bibliography
46810 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46811 LatexCommand bibitem
46812 key "latexcompanion"
46816 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
46818 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46819 Companion Second Edition.
46822 Addison-Wesley, 2004
46825 \begin_layout Bibliography
46826 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46827 LatexCommand bibitem
46832 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
46835 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46839 Addison-Wesley, 2003
46842 \begin_layout Bibliography
46843 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46844 LatexCommand bibitem
46852 : A Document Preparation System.
46855 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
46858 \begin_layout Bibliography
46859 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46860 LatexCommand bibitem
46869 The \SpecialChar TeX
46873 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46876 \begin_layout Bibliography
46877 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46878 LatexCommand bibitem
46883 The \SpecialChar TeX
46885 \begin_inset Newline newline
46889 \begin_inset Flex URL
46892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46894 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46902 \begin_layout Bibliography
46903 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46904 LatexCommand bibitem
46909 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46911 \begin_inset Newline newline
46915 \begin_inset Flex URL
46918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46920 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
46928 \begin_layout Bibliography
46929 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46930 LatexCommand bibitem
46936 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46938 name "Documentation"
46939 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46945 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46949 \begin_inset Newline newline
46953 \begin_inset Flex URL
46956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46958 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46966 \begin_layout Bibliography
46967 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46968 LatexCommand bibitem
46974 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46976 name "Documentation"
46977 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
46981 how to use the program
46983 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46987 \begin_inset Newline newline
46991 \begin_inset Flex URL
46994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46996 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
47004 \begin_layout Bibliography
47005 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47006 LatexCommand bibitem
47012 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47014 name "Documentation"
47015 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
47024 \begin_inset Newline newline
47028 \begin_inset Flex URL
47031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47033 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
47041 \begin_layout Bibliography
47042 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47043 LatexCommand bibitem
47049 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47051 name "Documentation"
47052 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
47061 \begin_inset Newline newline
47065 \begin_inset Flex URL
47068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47070 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
47078 \begin_layout Bibliography
47079 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47080 LatexCommand bibitem
47086 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47088 name "Documentation"
47089 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
47093 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
47095 \begin_inset Newline newline
47099 \begin_inset Flex URL
47102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47104 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
47112 \begin_layout Bibliography
47113 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47114 LatexCommand bibitem
47120 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47122 name "Documentation"
47123 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
47127 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47133 \begin_inset Index idx
47136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47138 -packages ! caption
47144 \begin_inset Newline newline
47148 \begin_inset Flex URL
47151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47153 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
47161 \begin_layout Bibliography
47162 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47163 LatexCommand bibitem
47169 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47171 name "Documentation"
47172 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
47176 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47182 \begin_inset Index idx
47185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47187 -packages ! enumitem
47193 \begin_inset Newline newline
47197 \begin_inset Flex URL
47200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47202 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
47210 \begin_layout Bibliography
47211 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47212 LatexCommand bibitem
47218 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47220 name "Documentation"
47221 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
47225 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47231 \begin_inset Index idx
47234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47236 -packages ! fancyhdr
47242 \begin_inset Newline newline
47246 \begin_inset Flex URL
47249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47251 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
47259 \begin_layout Bibliography
47260 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47261 LatexCommand bibitem
47267 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47269 name "Documentation"
47270 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
47274 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47280 \begin_inset Index idx
47283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47285 -packages ! hyperref
47291 \begin_inset Newline newline
47295 \begin_inset Flex URL
47298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47300 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
47308 \begin_layout Bibliography
47309 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47310 LatexCommand bibitem
47316 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47318 name "Documentation"
47319 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
47323 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47329 \begin_inset Index idx
47332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47334 -packages ! nomencl
47340 \begin_inset Newline newline
47344 \begin_inset Flex URL
47347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47349 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
47357 \begin_layout Bibliography
47358 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47359 LatexCommand bibitem
47365 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47367 name "Documentation"
47368 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
47372 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47378 \begin_inset Index idx
47381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47383 -packages ! prettyref
47389 \begin_inset Newline newline
47393 \begin_inset Flex URL
47396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47398 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
47406 \begin_layout Bibliography
47407 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47408 LatexCommand bibitem
47414 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47416 name "Documentation"
47417 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
47421 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47427 \begin_inset Index idx
47430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47432 -packages ! refstyle
47438 \begin_inset Newline newline
47442 \begin_inset Flex URL
47445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47447 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
47455 \begin_layout Bibliography
47456 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47457 LatexCommand bibitem
47463 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47466 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
47470 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47472 \begin_inset Newline newline
47476 \begin_inset Flex URL
47479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47481 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
47489 \begin_layout Bibliography
47490 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47491 LatexCommand bibitem
47497 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47500 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
47504 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47506 \begin_inset Newline newline
47510 \begin_inset Flex URL
47513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47515 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
47523 \begin_layout Bibliography
47524 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47525 LatexCommand bibitem
47531 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47534 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
47538 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47539 for Cyrillic languages:
47540 \begin_inset Newline newline
47544 \begin_inset Flex URL
47547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47549 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
47557 \begin_layout Bibliography
47558 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47559 LatexCommand bibitem
47565 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47568 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
47572 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47574 \begin_inset Newline newline
47578 \begin_inset Flex URL
47581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47583 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
47591 \begin_layout Bibliography
47592 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47593 LatexCommand bibitem
47599 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47602 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
47606 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47608 \begin_inset Newline newline
47612 \begin_inset Flex URL
47615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47617 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
47625 \begin_layout Bibliography
47626 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47627 LatexCommand bibitem
47633 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47636 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
47640 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47642 \begin_inset Newline newline
47646 \begin_inset Flex URL
47649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47651 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
47659 \begin_layout Bibliography
47660 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47661 LatexCommand bibitem
47667 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47670 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
47674 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47676 \begin_inset Newline newline
47680 \begin_inset Flex URL
47683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47685 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
47693 \begin_layout Bibliography
47694 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47695 LatexCommand bibitem
47701 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47704 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
47708 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47710 \begin_inset Newline newline
47714 \begin_inset Flex URL
47717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47719 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
47727 \begin_layout Bibliography
47728 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47729 LatexCommand bibitem
47735 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47738 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
47742 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47744 \begin_inset Newline newline
47748 \begin_inset Flex URL
47751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47753 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
47761 \begin_layout Bibliography
47762 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47763 LatexCommand bibitem
47769 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47772 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
47776 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47778 \begin_inset Newline newline
47782 \begin_inset Flex URL
47785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47787 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
47795 \begin_layout Bibliography
47796 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47797 LatexCommand bibitem
47803 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47806 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
47810 about new features in
47816 \begin_inset Newline newline
47820 \begin_inset Flex URL
47823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47825 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
47833 \begin_layout Standard
47834 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47868 \begin_inset Note Note
47871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47878 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
47879 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
47880 bibliography is the second one:
47888 \begin_layout Standard
47889 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47890 LatexCommand bibtex
47891 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47892 options "biblio/alphadin"
47899 \begin_layout Standard
47900 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47904 \begin_layout Standard
47905 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47906 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47912 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47913 LatexCommand printindex